JP2022052443A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game with new playability.SOLUTION: A game machine includes determination means for determining a winning/losing on the basis of the entry of a game ball into a start port, advantageous game execution means for executing an advantageous game that is advantageous to a player on the basis of a fact that the winning determination result is derived by the winning/losing determination, state setting means capable of setting a game state after the advantageous game to a specific state, second determination means for performing a second winning/losing determination, opening/closing control means for controlling the opening/closing of a variable start port on the basis of a fact that the winning determination result is derived, a winning port that can be opened by a game ball that has entered the variable start port, and putout control means for putting out a prize ball on the basis of the entry of the game ball into the winning port. When the game state is changed from the specific state to another game state before the opening/closing control of the variable start port is started, after the second winning/losing determination is executed during the specific state and the second winning/losing determination is performed, the variable start port is controlled to open/close according to the opening/closing condition in the specific state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 100

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a big role lottery is performed based on a game ball entering the starting opening, and when a big hit is won by this big role lottery, a gaming machine is known in which a big role game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened. .. In such a gaming machine, the fluctuation information is determined based on the result of the big winning combination lottery, and the fluctuation effect suggesting the winning expectation of the jackpot is executed based on the fluctuation information.

Patent Documents 1 and 2 propose a gaming machine in which a non-electric operating region is provided in a so-called electric chew, and a non-electric winning opening is opened by a gaming ball entering the variable starting opening. There is.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-121399 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-86699

As described above, a gaming machine having various playability has been proposed, but there is a demand for the development of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game by further new playability.

It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming by a new playability.

In order to solve the above problems, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a starting port including at least a variable starting port is provided in the gaming area, and the gaming state is a normal state and a variable starting port rather than the normal state. A gaming machine provided with a specific state that facilitates the entry of a game ball, and a determination means for determining whether or not the game ball has entered the starting port based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and a determination of winning based on the above-mentioned hit / fail determination. Based on the derivation of the result, the advantageous game executing means for executing the advantageous game advantageous to the player, the state setting means capable of setting the gaming state after the advantageous game to the specific state, and the establishment of predetermined conditions are satisfied. The variable start opening is opened / closed according to the opening / closing conditions corresponding to the gaming state, based on the second determination means for determining the second hit / fail and the winning determination result derived from the second hit / fail determination. An opening / closing control means for controlling, a winning opening that is openable / closable in the game area and can be opened by a game ball that has entered the variable starting opening, and a winning ball based on the entry of the game ball into the winning opening. The opening / closing control means is provided with a payout control means for paying out, and the open / close control means executes the second hit / fail determination, and after the second hit / miss determination, and of the variable start port. When the gaming state is changed from the specific state to another gaming state before the start of the opening / closing control, the variable starting port is controlled to open / close according to the opening / closing conditions of the specific state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the new playability.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which shows the state which the door which concerns on the simultaneous turning reference example is opened. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on the simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize opening which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the control means which controls the progress of the game which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU which concerns on a reference example of simultaneous rotation. It is a figure explaining the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit symbol random number determination table and the small hit symbol random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. (A) is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation pattern random number determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a fluctuation time determination table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state and the fluctuation time which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is 1st figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. (A) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the open / close control pattern table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game playability which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not performed properly which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the subcommand group set processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the evacuation process at the time of power-off in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the setting-related processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the gate passing process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st start port passing process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd start port passing process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the large winning opening passing process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the special game management phase which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special game management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the first flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol hit detection process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the number-cutting management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special symbol change in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol forced stop processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening preprocessing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening open / close switching process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening control process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening closure effective processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening end wait process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the normal game management phase which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during the normal symbol change in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the pre-processing for opening a prize opening of a normal electric accessory in a main control board which concerns on a reference example of simultaneous rotation. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening control process in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening closure effective processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening end weight processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the variation pattern without reach which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of loss which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect when the reach development effect which concerns on the effect reference example is executed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation production decision table which concerns on the production reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the hold display effect which concerns on the effect reference example. (A) is a diagram for explaining the final hold display pattern determination table according to the effect reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table according to the effect reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the sub CPU initialization process in the sub control board which concerns on an effect reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the subtimer interrupt processing in the sub-control board which concerns on a production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on a production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on a production reference example. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on Example. It is a partially enlarged view of the 2nd game area. It is a figure explaining the internal structure of the big prize opening. It is a figure explaining the 1st non-electric winning apparatus and the 2nd non-electric winning apparatus. It is the first figure explaining the operation of the 1st non-electric winning apparatus and the 2nd non-electric winning apparatus. It is a 2nd figure explaining the operation of the 1st non-electric winning apparatus and the 2nd non-electric winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the control means which controls the progress of the game which concerns on Example. It is a figure explaining the low probability big hit decision random number determination table which concerns on Example. It is a figure explaining the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on Example. It is a figure explaining the hit symbol random number determination table which concerns on Example. It is a figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing mode of a large winning opening and the opening / closing mode of a probabilistic region by a movable member. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table which concerns on Example. (A) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the open / close control pattern table according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the gaming state which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game playability which concerns on an Example. It is a timing chart of the 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period which concerns on Example. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the probability variation region passing process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the number-cutting management process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening end wait process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening end weight processing in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the payout control management process in the main control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 1st production system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the 1st production system. It is a figure explaining another example of the production content of the first production system. It is a figure explaining the 2nd production system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the 2nd production system. (A) is a diagram for explaining the third effect system, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the fourth effect system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the third production system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the 4th production system. (A) is a diagram for explaining the fifth effect system, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the sixth effect system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the fifth production system. It is a figure explaining an example of the production content of the sixth production system. It is a flowchart explaining the subtimer interrupt processing in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the opening designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening open designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal power release designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric closure designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the additional process in the auxiliary control board which concerns on Example. It is a figure explaining the structure of the operation handle which concerns on the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the dimensional relation of the operation handle which concerns on the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the maximum rotation position of the operation handle which concerns on the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the 1st application example of the operation handle. It is a figure explaining the 2nd application example of the operation handle. It is a figure explaining the game board which concerns on the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the outer rail in the state before being attached to the rail base which concerns on the 2nd modification. The perspective view of the game board, the outer rail and the rail base in the disassembled state which concerns on the 2nd modification is shown. It is a figure which shows the cross section A in FIG. 124 about the game board which concerns on the 2nd modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the position of the guide part in the state which the outer rail which concerns on a 2nd modification is attached to a game board.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in the examples are merely examples for facilitating the understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and the drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are designated by the same reference numerals to omit duplicate explanations, and elements not directly related to the present invention are not shown. do.

In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a reference example of simultaneous rotation, a mechanical configuration and an electrical configuration of a so-called simultaneous rotation machine, and specific processing on each substrate will be described. Then, as an effect reference example, a specific effect that can be executed by the simultaneous turning machine and a specific process related to the effect will be described. Then, as an example of the present invention, a configuration different from each reference example will be specifically described.

<Simultaneous turning reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous turning reference example, and shows a state in which the door is opened. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a surrounding space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 104 that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism. The middle frame 104 is provided with a front frame 106 that is openably and closably attached by a hinge mechanism.

Similar to the outer frame 102, the middle frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 108 is held in the surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transparent plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially in parallel while maintaining a predetermined distance from the front side of the game machine 100. , The game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. As shown in this figure, an operation handle 112 projecting to the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower part of the front frame 106. The operation handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate the operation handle 112. When the player rotates the operation handle 112 to perform a firing operation, the operation handle 112 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112 and is not shown. A game ball is launched by the launch mechanism. The game ball launched in this way rises between the rails 114a and 114b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116.

The game area 116 is a space formed at a distance between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area where the game ball can flow down or roll. The game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails and windmills (not shown) so that the game balls guided to the game area 116 collide with the nails and windmills and flow down and roll in irregular directions. I have to.

The game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of entry of the game balls is different from each other according to the firing intensity of the firing mechanism and the game balls can be hit separately. The first gaming area 116a is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second gaming area 116b is the gaming area 116 as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 100. It is located on the right side of. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball launched by the launch mechanism with a firing intensity lower than the predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is launched with a firing intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined strength. The resulting game ball will enter the second game area 116b.

Further, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118, a first fixed starting opening 120A, a first variable starting opening 120B, a second starting opening 122, and a normal drawing operating opening 125 in which a game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these general winning openings 118, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the first variable starting opening 120B, the second starting opening 122, and the normal drawing operating opening 125, predetermined prize balls are paid out to the player. Is done. In the following, the first fixed starting port 120A and the first variable starting port 120B are collectively referred to as the first starting port 120.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting area is provided in the first starting port 120, and a second starting area is provided in the second starting port 122. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and the game ball enters the first starting area or the second starting area, any one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is used. A lottery is held to determine the special symbol of 1. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not a large role game or a small hit game, which is advantageous for the player, can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player obtains a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtains an opportunity to acquire the right to receive various game benefits. It becomes.

Further, the first fixed starting port 120A, the second starting port 122, and the normal drawing operating port 125 are composed of a fixed starting port that is open so that the game ball can always enter. On the other hand, the movable piece 120b is provided in the first variable starting port 120B so as to be openable and closable, and the ease of entry of the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B changes according to the state of the movable piece 120b. It consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, during which time it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125, a lottery of ordinary symbols described later is performed. If the winner is won by this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be in the open state for a predetermined time. When the movable piece 120b is opened, the game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. As described above, the movable piece 120b is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B, and it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B than in the open state. Alternatively, it functions as a movable member (starting variable winning device) that shifts to an impossible closed state.

In addition, only the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a can enter the first fixed start port 120A, and the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 flow down the second game area 116b. It is arranged in a position where only the ball can enter. A game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed start port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is the second ball. It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 may be entered by a game ball flowing down the first game area 116a, but in this case, a game flowing down the second game area 116b. It is desirable that the ball is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a. In any case, the first fixed start port 120A is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down at least the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 are at least the first. 2 It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the game area 116b is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

Further, the second game area 116b is provided with a first large winning opening 126 and a second large winning opening 128. The first prize opening 126 and the second prize opening 128 are arranged at positions where only the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. However, the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b can be entered.

The opening / closing door 126b is provided in the first large winning opening 126 so as to be openable / closable. Normally, the opening / closing door 126b closes the first large winning opening 126 to allow the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 126. The ball is impossible. Specifically, the opening / closing door 126b is in a state of being flush with the board surface of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball flows down in front of the first large winning opening 126. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big role game is executed, the opening / closing door 126b is opened and functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the first big winning opening 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning opening 126. A sphere is possible. Then, when the game ball enters the first prize opening 126, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second big winning opening 128 is provided in the second gaming area 116b below the first big winning opening 126. The second large winning opening 128 includes a movable piece 128b, and the movable piece 128b is normally maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, when the small hit game described later is executed, the movable piece 128b is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 128. In the following, the first big winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 are collectively referred to as a big winning opening.

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the second large winning opening 128 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. The second game area 116b is provided with a structure 129 that protrudes from the front side of the game board 108. The structure 129 is surrounded by four sides and a bottom side located in the left-right direction and the front-back direction of the gaming machine 100, and an opening is formed in the upper portion. The opening formed in the upper part of the structure 129 becomes the second large winning opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. 3A, the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state in which the second special winning opening 128 is closed. ..

The movable piece 128b protrudes into the gaming area 116 in which the gaming ball rolls and flows so as to face above the gaming machine 100. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) will fall onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the bases of the structure 129 are substantially parallel in the horizontal direction, and the right side surface of the gaming machine 100 has a dimensional relationship slightly longer in the height direction than the left side surface. Therefore, in the second major winning opening 128, the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side, and the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is located so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Is inclined to. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3A, the game ball that has fallen on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls on the movable piece 128b from right to left. It will move.

Then, when the small hit game described later is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to an open state in which the second large winning opening 128 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 3B, the movable piece 128b shifts from the closed state to the open state by sliding toward the back surface side of the game board 108. As a result, when changing from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second large winning opening 128 by its own weight.

As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly tilted to secure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, by changing the movable piece 128b from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is guided into the second large winning opening 128. With the above configuration, even if the time for keeping the movable piece 128b in the open state is set slightly, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second large winning opening 128. In other words, the time required to keep the movable piece 128b in the open state, which is necessary for inserting a predetermined number of game balls into the second large winning opening 128, can be shortened. A hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed on the back surface of the structure 129, and the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108. .. Then, when the game ball enters the second prize opening 128, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

Although the configuration of the second large winning opening 128 has been described here, the first variable starting opening 120B also has the same configuration as the second large winning opening 128. That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B protrudes toward the front surface of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. Then, in the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides toward the back surface side of the game board 108, and the game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the movable piece 128b has the right side higher than the left side in the front view of the gaming machine 100, whereas the movable piece 120b has the left side in the front view of the gaming machine 100 on the right side. It is in a higher position than.

Here, the board surface configuration of the second gaming area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the uppermost portion of the second gaming area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous turning reference example, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball entering the second starting port 122.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a large role game or a small hit game is executed. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is opened.

Immediately below the second starting port 122 and the gate 124, the first large winning opening 126 is provided. When the first big winning opening 126 is in the open state, all the game balls that have passed through the gate 124 and flowed downward are arranged so as to enter the first big winning opening 126. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only in the big role game. That is, it can be said that the first large winning opening 126 is a large winning opening dedicated to the big role game. When a game ball enters the first prize opening 126 during a big role game, two or more predetermined numbers (15 in this case) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball. ..

A first variable starting port 120B is provided below the first large winning opening 126. Further, an out opening 131 is provided between the first large winning opening 126 and the first variable starting opening 120B. The out port 131 is an entrance of a passage for discharging the game ball from the game area 116, and even if the game ball enters the out port 131, the prize ball is not paid out.

In the second game area 116b, nails are arranged so that most of the game balls (for example, 90% or more) that have flowed down below the first prize opening 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. Further, by these nails, a part of the game ball (for example, 1% to 10%) that has flowed down below the first winning opening 126 is guided to the out opening 131.

In the closed state of the first variable starting port 120B, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. When the movable piece 120b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable starting port 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each game ball entering, and whether or not a large role game or a small hit game is executed is determined. A lottery will be held.

The gaming ball that has not entered the first variable starting port 120B falls from the movable piece 120b to the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100. A second big winning opening 128 is provided below the first variable starting opening 120B, and most of the game balls dropped from the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second big winning opening 128. do. The gaming ball on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls from the right side to the left side in the front view of the game machine 100 due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second large winning opening 128 is opened only in the small hit game. That is, it can be said that the second large winning opening 128 is a large winning opening dedicated to small hit games. If the movable piece 128b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second large winning opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large winning opening 128 during a small hit game, two or more predetermined numbers (15 in this case) of game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball. Is done.

At the lower left of the second large winning opening 128, a normal drawing operating opening 125 is provided. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all of the game balls that have fallen downward from the second large winning opening 128 enter the normal drawing operating opening 125. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the normal drawing operating port 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each entering ball of the game ball. Further, when the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125, it is determined whether or not the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) is opened, as in the case where the game ball passes through the gate 124. A lottery will be held.

At the bottom of the game area 116, a game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the normal drawing operating opening 125, and the large winning opening. Is provided on the back side of the game board 108 from the game area 116.

The gaming machine 100 is controlled by an effect display device 200 composed of a liquid crystal display device, an effect accessory device 202 composed of a movable device, and various lighting modes and emission colors as an effect device for producing an effect while the game is in progress. An effect lighting device 204 composed of a lamp, an audio output device 206 composed of a speaker, and an effect operation device 208 for receiving an operation of a player are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display unit 200a including an image display unit for displaying an image, and the main effect display unit 200a is visually recognized from the front side of the game machine 100 at a substantially central portion of the game board 108. Arranged as possible. As shown in the figure, the main effect display unit 200a is subjected to various effects such as variable display of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and is normally retracted in a state of being divided into a plurality of constituent members at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108, so that the player can evacuate. It is not visible. Then, when each component moves to a movable position on the front surface of the main effect display unit 200a by driving the actuator during the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, the front surface of the main effect display unit 200a. Each component is united to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided on the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, and the like, and is variously controlled to be lit according to the image or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the upper position of the front frame 106 and the lowest position of the outer frame 102, and is variously directed toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 according to the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a and the like. Output audio.

The effect operation device 208 is composed of a button that accepts a player's pressing operation, is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the game machine 100, and is provided at a position below the transmission plate 110. This effect operation device 208 is activated according to an image or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and when the player's operation is received within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. The production is executed.

In the figure, reference numeral 132 is an upper plate on which a prize ball paid out from the game machine 100 and a game ball rented from the game ball lending device are guided. It will be guided to the lower plate 134. Further, on the bottom surface of the lower plate 134, a ball extraction hole (not shown) for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 134 is formed. This ball pulling hole is normally closed by an opening / closing plate (not shown), but by pressing the ball pulling knob 134a, the opening / closing plate slides integrally with the ball pulling knob 134a, and the ball pulling hole It is possible to eject the game ball below the lower plate 134.

Further, on the game board 108, the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, and the first special symbol are held at a position outside the game area 116 and visible to the player. A display 164, a second special symbol hold display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a normal symbol hold display 170, and a right-handed notification display 172 are provided. Each of these indicators 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of a game according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 300a reads out the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 has a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first fixing for detecting that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting port 120A. A second variable start port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the first variable start port 120B, and a second variable start port detection switch 120Bs that detects that a game ball has entered the second start port 122. Starting port detection switch 122s, gate detection switch 124s for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, normal figure operating port detection switch 125s for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal drawing operating port 125, first large The first large winning opening detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered the winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening detection switch 128s that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 128 are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

Further, the main control board 300 has a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates a movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B, and a first large winning opening that operates an opening / closing door 126b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 126. The solenoid 126c and the second large winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second special winning opening 128 are connected, and the first variable starting port 120B and the first large are connected by the main control board 300. The opening and closing control of the winning opening 126 and the second major winning opening 128 is performed.

Further, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold display 164, a second special symbol hold display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. The symbol hold indicator 170 and the right-handed notification indicator 172 are connected, and the display control of each of these indicators is performed by the main control board 300.

Further, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back surface of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible by a dedicated key. The operation of changing and confirming the set value is possible on condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on. As will be described in detail later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example, one of the six stages of setting values having different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and the stored registered setting value is used. The game progresses. Here, it is assumed that the set value has 6 stages, but the set value may be provided in only 2 stages of high setting and low setting, or may be provided in other plurality of stages. Furthermore, the set value is not essential and the degree of advantage does not have to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s to the main control board 300. When the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

Further, a performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back surface of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays the registered set value and the base ratio on the performance display monitor 184.

Further, the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous turning reference example mainly has a special game started by entering the gaming ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting opening 122, and the passing of the gaming ball to the gate 124, or , It is roughly classified into a normal game started by entering a game ball into the normal game opening 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for advancing special games and normal games, as well as data and tables required for various games.

Further, a payout control board 310 and a sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300. The payout control board 310 controls to launch the game ball and controls to pay out the prize ball. The payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310, and various information on the game progress output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312. , It will be output to the hall computer of the game store.

Further, a payout motor 314 for paying out the game ball stored in the storage unit to the player as a prize ball is connected to the payout control board 310. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to control the player to pay out a predetermined prize ball. At this time, the number of game balls paid out is detected by the payout ball counting switch 316s, and it is possible to know whether or not the prize balls to be paid out have been paid out to the player.

Further, a plate full tank detection switch 318s for detecting the full tank state of the lower plate 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. The plate full tank detection switch 318s is provided in a passage leading the game ball to be paid out as a prize ball to the lower plate 134, and the game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310.

Then, when a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 134 and the tank is full, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower plate 134, and the plate full tank detection switch 318s is directed toward the payout control board 310. , The game ball detection signal is continuously input. When the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower plate 134 is in a full tank state, and transmits a plate full tank command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the dish full tank command is transmitted, it is determined that the full tank state has been canceled, and the dish full tank release command is transmitted to the main control board 300.

Further, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 310 is provided with an operation handle 112, and is connected to a touch sensor 112s for detecting that the player touches the operation handle 112 and an operation volume 112a for detecting the operation angle of the operation handle 112. ing. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the launch control circuit 320 controls to energize the launch solenoid 112c provided in the game ball launcher to launch the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub control board 330 includes a sub CPU 330a, a sub ROM 330b, and a sub RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330 in one direction. .. The sub CPU 330a reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, and the like, performs arithmetic processing, and executes and controls the effect. At this time, the sub RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub control board 330, the sub CPU 330a, the sub ROM 330b, and the sub RAM 330c cooperate to function as a sub main, an image control unit, an accessory control unit, a lighting control unit, and a voice control unit. The sub-main determines the content of the effect to be executed and manages and supervises the execution of the effect according to various input commands. The image control unit performs image display control for displaying an image on the main effect display unit 200a. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as a pattern, a background, and subtitles displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the image control unit reads the image data from the sub ROM 330b into a VRAM (not shown) and mains the image data. Controls the image display of the effect display unit 200a.

Further, the accessory control unit drives the actuator according to the management of the effect by the sub-main, and movably controls the effect device 202. The lighting control unit controls lighting of the effect lighting device 204. In addition, the voice control unit performs voice output control for outputting voice from the voice output device 206. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of audio data such as audio and music output from the audio output device 206, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from the sub ROM 330b to control the audio output of the audio output device 206. do.

Further, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined effect when an operation detection signal is input from the effect operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the effect operation device 208 has been pressed or rotated.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. Further, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply including a capacitor.

FIG. 5 is an address map of a memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In FIG. 5, the address is shown in hexadecimal, and "H" is shown in hexadecimal. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b is a used area (0000H to 1A7AH) for storing a program and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the used area, and is a process for performing a test specified by the game machine rules. An unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing a program and data for executing a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including a process for calculating the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184). And are provided.

The used area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H) in which a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored, an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H) in which data other than the program is stored. ~ 1A7AH) is provided. The used area may not include an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The non-use area of the main ROM 300b is a program area (2000H to 27FFH) in which a program for executing a process for performing a test specified by the game machine rules and a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is stored. A data area (2800H to 2BFFF) in which data other than these programs are stored is provided.

Further, in the memory area of the main ROM 300b, in addition to the used area and the unused area, a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a program title, and a version are stored is stored. ), An unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for the main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is a used area (F000H to F1FFH) temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, and an area other than the used area, according to the rules of the gaming machine. An unused area (F210H to F228H) temporarily used when a program for performing a predetermined test or a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed is provided.

The used area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H to F12AH) temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and the progress of the game. A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program is provided. The used area may not include an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H).

In the non-use area of the main RAM 300c, a work area (F210H) temporarily used when a program for performing a test specified by the game machine rules or a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is being executed. ~ F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data when these programs are executed is provided.

Further, in the memory area of the main RAM 300c, an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH) are provided in addition to the used area and the unused area.

As described above, in the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c, the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, the process for performing the test specified by the game machine rules, and the process for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. It is provided separately from the out-of-use area used to execute.

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the non-used area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area that separates the used area and the unused area, the boundary between the used area and the unused area becomes clear, and a program for controlling the progress of the game is provided. When the out-of-use area is used during execution, and when the program for performing the test specified by the game machine rules or for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed. It prevents the used area from being used.

The unused area provided between the used area and the unused area may be at least 1 byte or more, preferably 4 bytes or more from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, and is set to 16 bytes or more. Is more desirable. Further, although the unused area is prohibited from writing and reading data, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing from the viewpoint of preventing fraud.

Next, the game in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, proceed in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in one of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, and in the normal game, the game is in any of the non-short-time game state, the medium-time short-time game state, and the short-time game state. The game progresses.

The details of each game state will be described later, but the low-probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to execute a large role game in which the big winning opening is opened is set low, and is called a high-probability game state. Is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to perform a major role game is set high. Further, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is difficult to open and the game ball is difficult to enter into the first variable start port 120B, and the medium-time-time-saving game state is a non-time-saving game. This is a gaming state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be opened than in the state, and the gaming ball is more likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. Further, the reduced working hours state is a gaming state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be opened and the game ball is most likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B than in the medium and short working hours gaming state. In the time-saving game state, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second game area 116b during the game, the game ball is set to decrease slightly or hardly decrease. ..

As described above, since the special game and the normal game proceed in parallel at the same time, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, the non-time-saving game state, the medium-time short-time game state, and the time-saving game It becomes a gaming state in which any of the states is combined. In the following, for ease of understanding, the gaming state related to the special game, that is, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are referred to as the special gaming state, and the gaming state related to the normal game, that is, the non-time-saving gaming state, medium. The time-saving game state and the time-saving game state may be referred to as a normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to launch the game ball into the game area 116 and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player is given a game. A lottery for whether or not to give a profit (hereinafter referred to as a "major role lottery") is held. In this big role lottery, if a big hit is won, a big role game is executed in which the big prize opening is opened and a game ball can be entered into the big prize opening, and the game state after the end of the big role game is executed. Is set to any of the above gaming states. Hereinafter, the major role lottery method will be described.

As will be described in detail later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, various random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, winning symbol random numbers, variable pattern random numbers) related to the big winning combination lottery are acquired. At the same time, each of these random numbers is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area when the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 hold, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. The various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area are collectively called special 2 hold.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reserved storage area and the second special figure reserved storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 hold is stored in order from the first storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, the special 1 hold is special. 2 Holds are stored in order from the first storage unit of the second special figure hold storage area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if the hold is not stored in any of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area, the first storage unit is used. Special 1 Hold is memorized. Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 in a state where the special 1 hold is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, the special 1 hold is set in the fourth storage unit. Remember. Further, even when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is stored in the 1st to 4th storage units of the 2nd special figure hold storage area in the same manner as described above. Special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number).

However, the number of special 1 hold (X1) and the number of special 2 hold (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure hold storage area and the second special figure hold storage area are set to four, respectively. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if four special 1 holdings are already stored in the first special drawing holding storage area, the first starting port 120 is entered. No new special 1 hold is memorized by entering the game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, if four special 2 holdings are already stored in the second special figure holding storage area, the game to the second starting port 122 is performed. No new special 2 hold is memorized by entering the ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, the big hit determination random number determination table is selected according to the game state at the time of determining the jackpot, and the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number are used. A big role lottery will be held.

In the low-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning combination lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the low probability big hit determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, six stages of set values having different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each set value. During the game, the set value is set to one of the six stages, and the random number judgment at the time of low probability corresponding to the currently set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) is determined. A big role lottery is held with reference to the table.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 1 (registered set value = 1), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 6 (a). Is done. According to this low probability big hit decision random number judgment table a, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10218, it is judged as a big hit, and when the big hit decision random number is 20001 to 38996, it is judged as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 300.6, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value = 2 (registered set value = 2), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6 (b). Is done. According to this low probability big hit decision random number judgment table b, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10225, it is judged as a big hit, and when the big hit decision random number is 20001 to 38996, it is judged as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 291.2, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value = 3 (registered set value = 3), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6 (c). Is done. According to this low probability big hit decision random number judgment table c, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10232, it is judged as a big hit, and when the big hit decision random number is 20001 to 38996, it is judged as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 282.4, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value = 4 (registered set value = 4), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. 6 (d). Is done. According to this low probability big hit decision random number judgment table d, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10239, it is judged as a big hit, and when the big hit decision random number is 20001 to 38996, it is judged as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 274.2, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 5 (registered set value = 5), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6 (e). Is done. According to this low probability big hit determination random number determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10246, it is determined to be a big hit, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 266.4, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 6 (registered set value = 6), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. 6 (f). Is done. According to the low probability big hit decision random number determination table f, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10253, it is determined as a big hit, and when the big hit determination random number is 20001 to 38996, it is determined as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 259.0, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning combination lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the high-probability big hit determination random number determination table is referred to. The high probability jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value in the same manner as the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table.

When the game is in a high-probability game state and the set value is set to 1 (registered set value = 1), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7 (a). Is done. According to this high probability big hit decision random number judgment table a, when the big hit decision random number is 10001 to 10620, it is judged as a big hit, and when the big hit decision random number is 20001 to 38996, it is judged as a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 105.7, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

Similarly, in the case of a high-probability gaming state and the set value is set to 2 to 6 (registered set value = 2 to 6), the high probability time shown in FIGS. 7 (b) to 7 (f) is a high hit. A large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the determined random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, when the jackpot determination random numbers are the values shown in the figures, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, when the set value = 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 102.4 to 1 / 91.0, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

As described above, the big role lottery is performed according to the registered set value. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot differs depending on the registered set value, and it is easier to win the jackpot when the registered set value is large than when it is small. Here, it is assumed that the winning probability of the small hit does not change even if the registered setting value is different, but the winning probability of the small hit may be different for each registered setting value. Further, the small hit is not essential, and only one of the big hit and the loss may be determined in the big win lottery.

Further, here, the winning probability of the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered set value, but the jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is determined. Only the winning probability of is different depending on the registered setting value.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a hit symbol random number determination table and a small hit symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the above-mentioned big winning combination lottery, the type of the special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if the "big hit" is won by the special 1 hold, the symbol random number determination table a for the special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the "big hit" is won by the special 2 hold. In that case, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), when the symbol random number determination table b for special 2 is selected and the "small hit" is won by the special 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 8 (c). When the special 1 small hit symbol random number determination table a is selected and the special 2 hold wins the "small hit", as shown in FIG. 8 (d), the special 2 small hit symbol random number determination table b is selected. In the following, a special symbol determined by a winning symbol random number, that is, a special symbol determined when a jackpot determination result is obtained is referred to as a jackpot symbol, and is determined when a small hit determination result is obtained. The special symbol is called a small hit symbol, and the special symbol determined when the determination result of loss is obtained is called a loss symbol.

According to the special 1 hit symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (a) and the special 2 hit symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (b), according to the acquired value of the winning symbol random number, As shown in the figure, a jackpot symbol (special symbols A to J) is determined as a special symbol. Further, according to the special 1 small hit symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (c) and the special 2 small hit symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (d), the acquired value of the winning symbol random number. As shown in the figure, small hit symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

If the result of the big role lottery is "missing" and the lottery result is derived by holding special 1, special symbol X is determined as the losing symbol without performing lottery, and the lottery result is special 2. When derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as a lost symbol without performing a lottery. That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred only when the big winning lottery result is "big hit", and is not referred to when the big winning lottery result is "missing" or "small hit". Further, the small hit symbol random number determination table is referred only when the large winning combination lottery result is "small hit", and is not referred to when the large winning combination lottery result is "big hit" or "missing". The special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are small hit symbols, are collectively referred to as a special symbol Z.

FIG. 9A is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation time determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It should be noted that a plurality of variable pattern random number determination tables are provided for each of the hold type, the result of the large winning combination lottery (special symbol type), the game state, the number of changes, and the number of holds, but here, any change pattern random number determination is provided. The table x will be described. When the type of the special symbol is determined as described above, when the game ball enters the fluctuation pattern random number determination table as shown in FIG. 9A and the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122. One of the fluctuation pattern numbers is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random numbers in the range of 0 to 238 acquired in. As shown in FIG. 9B, the fluctuation pattern numbers are associated with fluctuation times. This fluctuation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

As will be described in detail later, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 1 hold and the fluctuation pattern number, that is, the fluctuation time is determined, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 160 over the determined fluctuation time. When the fluctuation display is performed and the fluctuation time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. Further, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 2 hold and the fluctuation pattern number, that is, the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation display of the symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 162 over the determined fluctuation time. After that, when the fluctuation time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. At this time, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, so that the lost symbol is confirmed as a result of the large winning combination lottery, the large winning combination lottery based on the next special 1 hold becomes possible, and the lost symbol is the second. By stopping and displaying on the special symbol display 162, the loss is confirmed as a result of the big winning combination lottery, and the big winning combination lottery based on the next special 2 hold can be executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, the jackpot is confirmed as a result of the major role lottery, the big role game is executed, and the small hit symbol is the second special. When the symbol display 162 is stopped and displayed, the small hit is confirmed as a result of the big winning combination lottery, and the small hit game is executed.

In this way, the fluctuation time defines the time for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, in other words, the time until the result of the large winning combination lottery is confirmed. However, a plurality of fluctuation pattern random number determination tables for determining the fluctuation time are provided according to the hold type, the result of the large winning combination lottery (special symbol type), the game state, and the like. As a result, even if the acquired fluctuation pattern random numbers have the same value, different fluctuation pattern numbers, that is, fluctuation times are determined by the selected fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

When the variation pattern number is determined as described above, the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern number is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, the mode of the variation effect is determined based on the received variation pattern command, but the details thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a gaming state and a fluctuation time according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. As described above, the special game state and the normal game state are combined to form one game state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As described above, there are two types of special gaming states, a low-probability gaming state and a high-probability gaming state, in which the winning probabilities of big hits are different. In addition, there are three types of normal game states: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-short game state, and a time-short-time game state, in which the ease of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B (ball entry frequency) is different from each other. Has been done.

Here, in a normal game, the ease of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, fluctuation time, and opening time. As will be described in detail later, in a normal game, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125, the normal drawing hold is stored. Then, based on the stored normal map reservation, a normal map lottery is performed to determine whether or not to release the movable piece 120b. The result of this general drawing lottery is confirmed when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When the hit is confirmed as a result of the normal drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery, the fluctuation time, and the opening time when opening the movable piece 120b are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous turning reference example, as shown in FIG. 10A, six types of gaming states are provided depending on the combination of the special gaming state and the normal gaming state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In the non-time saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the gaming state in which the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a normal state.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state may be set, and the gaming state in which both of them are combined is called the most dominant state. In addition, this most superior state has the highest degree of advantage among the six game states, and if the game ball is properly fired, the game ball gradually increases during the game even if the jackpot is not won. It is set to go.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it may be set to a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. In the short-time game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. In the following, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are combined is referred to as a low-probability time-saving state.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it may be set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are combined is referred to as a high-probability time-saving state or a high-probability precursor state. The high-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy precursor state will be described in detail later.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it may be set to a high-probability gaming state and a medium-time short-time gaming state. In the medium-time short-time game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is higher than in the non-time-short-time game state and lower than in the time-short-time game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. This gaming state can be set when an unexpected situation occurs, such as when the gaming ball is not properly launched. In the following, a gaming state in which a high-probability gaming state and a medium-time short-time gaming state are combined is referred to as a penalty state.

In the sub control board 330, an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state set in the main control board 300 is set. The effect mode defines a background image, a BGM, or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the content of the effect is different for each effect mode. That is, the player can identify the current gaming state by the effect mode.

As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, six gaming states are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 10B, the variation pattern random number determination table is selected and selected according to the game state, the hold type, the number of fluctuations in the game state, and the symbol type when the big winning combination lottery is performed. The fluctuation pattern number is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern random number determination table.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial fluctuation target is set for each gaming state. The substantive change target originally indicates the type of hold for which the big role lottery should be performed, and either the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is set as the real change target for each game state. In the normal state, the special 1 hold is set as a target for substantial fluctuation. Further, in the normal state, since the normal gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, the first variable starting port 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to allow the game ball to enter the first fixed start port 120A.

In the normal state, the large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the table A is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table A, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Further, in the normal state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold and the big hit symbol is determined, the table B is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table B, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, the table C is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table C, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes. In this way, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player puts the game ball into the second starting port 122, the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold is performed. Execution opportunities are extremely reduced.

Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided in the second game area 116b, and the second starting port 122 is composed of a fixed starting port to which a game ball can always enter. Further, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second starting port 122 is arranged at a position where the gaming ball can easily enter the ball, as compared with the first starting opening 120. Therefore, if the variable time related to the special 2 hold is set to a short time in the normal state, the player is given more chances of the big role lottery than necessary. Therefore, in order to appropriately launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in accordance with the original playability in the normal state, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes.

In the most dominant state, the special 2 hold is set as a target for substantial fluctuation. Therefore, in the most dominant state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. In the most dominant state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, the table D is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table D, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 seconds. It should be noted that the case where the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is not the real change target in the most superior state is more playable than the case where the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the real change target in the normal state. The effect is small. Therefore, in the most dominant state, the fluctuation time when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold, which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, is set as short as 10 seconds.

In the most dominant state, a large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is a real fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the table E is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table E, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 1 second to 3 seconds. Further, in the most dominant state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold, and when the big hit symbol is determined, the table F is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table F, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the special 1 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Further, in the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the normal gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in these two gaming states, the player needs to launch the gaming ball toward the second gaming area 116b in order to allow the gaming ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In both of these two gaming states, the same variation pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two gaming states are common in that the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state. That is, when the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the table G is used as the variation pattern random number determination table. Be selected. According to this table G, the fluctuation time of 1 second is always determined. Further, in the case of the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold, and when the big hit symbol is determined, the table H is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table H, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

In the high-probability precursor state, the special 1 hold is set as a real fluctuation target. Further, in the high probability precursor state, the normal gaming state is set to the reduced working hours gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the first variable start opening 120B. In the high probability precursor state, a large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is a real fluctuation target, and when a lost symbol or a small hit symbol is determined, the table J is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table J, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. Further, in the high probability precursor state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold, and when the big hit symbol is determined, the table K is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. According to this table K, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the low probability time saving state, the high probability time saving state and the high probability precursor state, that is, the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, and the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the actual fluctuation target, the big role lottery is performed. Different fluctuation patterns depending on the number of fluctuations related to the special 2 hold after being set in each game state (the number of fluctuations of the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 162; hereinafter referred to as "second fluctuation number"). The random number judgment table is selected. Specifically, when the second variation number of times after being set to the time saving game state is 4 times or less, a special table is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this special table, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 1 minute. On the other hand, when the second variation number of times after being set to the time saving game state is 5 times or more, the table I is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table I, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, the special 1 hold is set as a target for substantial fluctuation. Further, in the penalty state, the normal gaming state is set to the medium-time short-time gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B. In the penalty state, the large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the table L is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table L, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Further, in the penalty state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold and the big hit symbol is determined, the table M is selected as the variation pattern random number determination table. According to this table M, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, when the large winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, the table N is selected as the fluctuation pattern random number determination table regardless of the determined symbol type. According to this table N, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

As described above, the actual fluctuation target is set for each game state, and when the large winning combination lottery based on the hold type as the substantial fluctuation target is performed, the fluctuation time is 100 seconds at the longest. On the other hand, when a large winning combination lottery based on a hold type that is not a target of substantial fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is approximately 10 minutes, so that a game contrary to the original game playability is not performed.

In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the case where the average of the fluctuation time of the high-accuracy precursor state (second period) is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-accuracy precursor state (first period) will be described. The average variation time of the state (second period) may be longer than the average variation time of the highly probable precursor state (first period). That is, the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy time-shortening state (second period) and the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy precursor state (first period) may be different.

FIG. 11 is a first diagram for explaining a special electric accessory operating ram set table according to a simultaneous turning reference example, and FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a special electric accessory operating ram set table according to a simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure of 2. The special electric accessory operating ram set table stores various data for controlling the large role game or the small hit game, and the special electric accessory operating ram set is stored during the large role game and the small hit game. With reference to the table, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c is energized and controlled. In fact, a plurality of special electric accessory operating ram set tables are provided for each type of special symbol (big hit symbol and small hit symbol), and the corresponding table plays a major role according to the determined special symbol type. It is set at the start of a game or a small hit game, but here, for convenience of explanation, control data of a special symbol is shown for each symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 11, the big winning game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small hit game is executed only once. According to this special electric bonus actuating ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started), the maximum number of special electric bonus actuations (executed during one big role game or small hit game). Number of round games to be played), number of special electric accessory opening / closing switching (number of times of opening of the big winning opening in one round), solenoid energization time (first big winning opening solenoid 126c or second for each number of opening of big winning opening) Energization time of the large winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, the opening time of one large winning opening), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be made to the large winning opening in one round game), the effective closing time of the large winning opening (round) Closing time of the big winning opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (variation display of the symbol described later)) However, as control data, it is stored in advance for each type of special symbol as shown in the figure.

If the jackpot is won by holding the special 1 and the special symbols A, B, and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, the big role game composed of four round games is executed. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, when the jackpot is won by the special 1 hold and the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the big role game composed of 10 round games is executed. In these big role games, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, when the small hit is won by the special 1 hold and the special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as the small hit symbols, the small hit game composed of one round game is executed. In this small hit game, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 1 time in one round game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, when the jackpot is won by the special 2 hold and the special symbols F, G, and I are determined as the jackpot symbols, the big role game composed of four round games is executed. To. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, when the jackpot is won by holding the special 2 and the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the big role game composed of 10 round games is executed. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, even when a small hit is won by holding the special 2 and the special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as the small hit symbols, the small hit game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 2 times in one round game. The interval time during the round, which is the rest time between the two opening of the second prize opening 128, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game ball is fired at the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds, considering the opening time of the second big winning opening 128 and the firing interval of the game ball, the game ball wins the second big prize during this small hit game. The probability of entering the mouth 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the structure is such that the game ball easily stays on the movable piece 128b that keeps the second large winning opening 128 in the closed state, and the movable piece 128b is moved to the open state. The game ball staying on the piece 128b is guided into the second large winning opening 128. Therefore, by opening the second big winning opening 128 for 0.1 seconds x 2 times, an average of 2 to 3 game balls will enter the 2nd big winning opening 128.

Further, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 3 times in one round game. The interval time during the round in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small hit game, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128.

Further, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 12 times in one round game. The interval time during the round in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small hit game, by continuously firing the game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls can be entered into the second large winning opening 128. can.

At the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of launched balls of the gaming ball and the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a special symbol Z4 in which the 0.1 second opening is performed twice in the small hit game and a special symbol Z5 in which the 0.1 second opening is performed three times in the small hit game are provided. By simply changing these selection ratios, the firing prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the major role game according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the big role game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the hold type, and the type of the special symbol (big hit symbol), and after the big role game is completed. Set the game status of.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a normal state or a penalty state, if the big hit is won by the special 1 hold which is a substantial fluctuation target, the game state after the big role game is set according to the type of the big hit symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to a low probability time saving state (a special gaming state is a low probability gaming state, and a normal gaming state is a time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of times the time-saving game state is continued (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving number of times") is set to 100 times. This means that the reduced working hours game state will continue until the big role lottery is held 100 times. However, the above-mentioned number of time reductions indicates the maximum number of continuations in the time-saving gaming state of 1, and if a big hit is won before reaching the above-mentioned number of continuations, the game state is set again. It will be. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big role game, if the lottery result other than the big hit is derived 100 times without deriving the lottery result of the big hit in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state is obtained. The game state will be changed to (normal state).

When the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the high probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number, and the high probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. In addition, "next time" is set as the number of time reductions, and the time reduction game state continues until the next big hit is won. Therefore, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the high-accuracy time-saving state will continue until the next big hit is won after the big role game.

When the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the reduced-time gaming state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number, and the time reduction number is set to 100 times. When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, while the time-saving gaming state ends in 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the game state shifts to the most dominant state when the result of the big role lottery is derived 100 times after the big role game.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal state or the penalty state, if the big hit is won by the special 2 hold which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the normal state (the special gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state). When the special symbols G to J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the penalty state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the medium-time short-time gaming state) is set. At this time, both the high accuracy number and the time reduction number are set to "next time".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the most dominant state, if the big hit is won by the special 1 hold which is not the target of the substantial fluctuation, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the low probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols B to E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the gaming state after the major role game is set as in the normal state and the penalty state.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the most dominant state, if the big hit is won by the special 2 hold which is the target of the substantial fluctuation, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the low probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. When the special symbols G and I are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the high probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state) is set. At this time, the high accuracy number and the time reduction number are set to "next time".

When the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the reduced-time gaming state) is set. At this time, the high accuracy number is set to "next time", and the time reduction number is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, or a high probability precursor state, that is, when the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the gaming state after the big role game is the normal state. And is set in the same way as the penalty state.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a hit determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal drawing operating port 125, it is associated with whether or not the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is energized and controlled. Judgment processing of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "general drawing lottery") is performed.

As will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal drawing operating port 125, one hit determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99, and this random number is obtained. Numerical values are stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c up to four. That is, the normal figure reservation storage area includes four storage units for storing the winning determination random numbers. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal figure operating port 125 in a state where the determined random numbers are stored in all four storage units of the normal figure reservation storage area, the game concerned. The winning random number is not stored based on the passage of the sphere. In the following, the winning determination random number stored in the normal figure hold storage area when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal figure operation port 125 is referred to as a normal figure hold.

When the normal drawing lottery is started when the normal gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, the hit determination random number determination table for the non-time saving gaming state is referred to as shown in FIG. 14A. According to this non-time saving game state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the non-time saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when the winning symbol is determined in this general drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be in the open state, and when the lost symbol is determined, the first variable starting is performed. The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is maintained in the closed state.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the medium-time short-time game state, the winning determination random number determination table for the medium-time short-time game state is referred to as shown in FIG. 14 (b). According to the hit determination random number determination table for the medium-time short game state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 49, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and the hit determination random number is 50 to 99. In addition, the lost symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the medium-time short-time game state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 14 (c), the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving gaming state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 99, it is normal. A lost symbol is determined as the type of symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the time-saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 15A is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 15B is a diagram for explaining an open / close control pattern table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the regular drawing lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table is referred to when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined when the winning symbol or the lost symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state and the medium-time saving gaming state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state. If so, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1 second. When the fluctuation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) over the determined time. Then, when the winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when the lost symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to open / close as shown in FIG. 15 (b). The energization is controlled by referring to the pattern table. In reality, the open / close control pattern table is provided for each gaming state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c according to the gaming state when the normal symbol is determined. ..

When the winning symbol is determined, as shown in FIG. 15B, the opening / closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is performed with reference to the opening / closing control pattern table. According to this open / close control pattern table, the time before opening the normal electric power (waiting time until the opening of the first variable starting port 120B is started) and the maximum number of times of switching the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory (opening of the first variable starting port 120B). Number of times), solenoid energization time (energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c for each opening number of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, opening time of the first variable starting port 120B once), specified number (first variable) The maximum number of winnings to the first variable starting port 120B while the starting port 120B is fully opened), the effective closing time of the normal electric power (the closing time between each opening of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, the pause time), the general electric power Effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), normal power end wait time (waiting until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol described later is resumed after the normal electric power effective state time elapses). Time) is stored in advance as control data of the first variable starting port 120B for each gaming state as shown in the figure.

In this way, by setting the winning probability, the fluctuation time, and the opening time of the normal symbol, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 15B, the firing prize ball ratio (for the game ball launched in the game area 116) The ratio of the number of prize balls that the game ball enters into the first variable starting port 120B, the second starting port 122, the normal drawing operating port 125, and the large winning opening and is paid out to the player) is the number of shots in the non-time-saving game state. : The number of prize balls = 100: 20, the number of shots in the medium-time short game state: the number of prize balls = 100: 40, and the number of shots in the short-time game state: the number of prize balls = 100: 99.

The opening / closing condition of the first variable starting port 120B defines three elements: the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. That is, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B, in each of the non-short-time game state, the medium-time-short game state, and the short-time game state, The frequency of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B and the firing prize ball ratio can be set. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and if the three elements are combined so that the firing prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. good.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a transition of a gaming state according to the original game playability according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. With the above configuration, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following playability. Here, a case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in FIG. 16A. In the normal state, since the substantial fluctuation target is set to the special 1 hold, the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to allow the game ball to enter the first fixed start port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player performs so-called "left-handed" in a normal state.

When the game ball enters the first fixed start port 120A, the special 1 hold is stored in the first special figure hold storage area. The special 1 hold stored in the first special figure hold storage area is sequentially read out when the start condition is satisfied, and a large winning combination lottery is performed based on the read special 1 hold. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to about 1 / 300.6. In the normal state, in the big role lottery based on this special 1 hold, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit. The firing prize ball ratio when the game ball is launched toward the first game area 116a is set to 100:20, and the number of game balls decreases during the game.

Then, in the normal state, if a big hit is won in the big role lottery by holding the special 1, the big role game is executed. In this big role game, a round game in which the first big winning opening 126 is opened is executed four or ten times, and the player can win four or ten rounds of prize balls. Then, if the jackpot is won by holding the special 1, one of the special symbols A to E is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the gaming state after the big role game is the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16 (b). If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 30%. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 30% probability that the gaming state will shift to the low probability time saving state. In the low probability time saving state, the actual fluctuation target is set to the special 1 hold, but since the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the player has to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2 Right-handed aiming at the game area 116b will be performed.

That is, in this low probability time saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit in the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold. In the low probability time saving state, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1 / 300.6, but since the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the firing prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a big hit while reducing the consumption of the game ball.

In addition, when shifting to the low probability time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times, and if the big hit is not won in the 100 times big role lottery, the gaming state will shift to the normal state again (time saving omission). ).

Further, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are the special symbols B and D, the gaming state after the big role game is the high accuracy time reduction shown in FIG. 16 (c). It becomes a state. If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbols B and D will be determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-accuracy time-saving state. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the actual fluctuation target is set to the special 1 hold, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the player has to enter the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2 Right-handed aiming at the game area 116b will be performed.

That is, in this high-accuracy time-saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit in the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1 / 105.7, and since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the firing prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can perform a large role lottery while reducing the consumption of the game ball. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, it can be said that the next big hit is virtually guaranteed.

Further, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are the special symbols C and E, the gaming state after the major role game is a highly accurate precursor shown in FIG. 16 (d). It becomes a state. If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbols C and E will be determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high probability precursor state. In the high-accuracy precursor state, the actual fluctuation target is set to the special 1 hold, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player has to enter the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. 2 Right-handed aiming at the game area 116b will be performed.

When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high probability precursor state is set and the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big role game reaches 100 times, the time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the most dominant state shown in FIG. 16 (e) due to the time saving omission. As will be described in detail later, in the most dominant state, the number of game balls can be increased only by continuously firing the game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high probability precursor state, the goal of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to get out of the game in a short time without winning the jackpot.

According to the special 1 hold of the real fluctuation target in the high probability precursor state, the high probability time saving state, and the low probability time saving state, when the big hit is won, the special symbols A to E are determined as the big hit symbols. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16 (b). Further, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a highly accurate time saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the most dominant state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area. The special 2 hold stored in the second special figure hold storage area is sequentially read out when the start condition is satisfied, and a large winning combination lottery is performed based on the read special 2 hold. At this time, the winning probability of the big hit is set to about 1 / 105.7, and the winning probability of the small hit is set to about 1 / 3.45. In the most superior state, in the big role lottery based on this special 2 hold, winning a small hit is the biggest purpose of the game.

Specifically, when a game ball is launched into the second game area 116b, the ratio of the prize balls paid out by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 122 with respect to the number of launched balls is 100: 60 to 80. It is set to a degree. Then, in the most superior state, in the large winning combination lottery by holding the special 2, the small hit game is frequently performed because the small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 3.45. Here, if a small hit is won by holding the special 2, the small hit symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128. In the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z5 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128. Further, in the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a substantially specified number of game balls enter the second large winning opening 128.

When a game ball enters the second prize opening 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball. As a result, in the most dominant state, the launch prize ball ratio, which is the ratio of all prize balls to the number of launch balls, becomes 100: 120, and the game balls are simply fired toward the second game area 116b. Can be increased.

In this most dominant state, the normal gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, and the movable piece 120b is rarely opened. In addition, in the most dominant state, the special gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the most dominant state is about 1 / 105.7. It can be said that the winning of the jackpot is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 hold of the real fluctuation target in this most dominant state, when the jackpot is won, the special symbols F to J are determined as the jackpot symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 16 (b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a highly accurate time saving state. Further, when the special symbols H and J are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most advantageous state has an extremely high degree of advantage as compared with other gaming states, the greatest purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the gaming state to the most dominant state. As described above, the game is first started in the normal state, but does not shift from this normal state to the most dominant state at once. Therefore, the transition route of shifting to the highest superior state via the highly accurate precursor state becomes the transition route to the highest superior state in the gaming machine 100.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it is set as a condition for transition from the high probability precursor state to the highest advantage state to win a specific small hit symbol, apart from the time saving omission in the high probability precursor state. Specifically, when a small hit is won by holding the special 1 which is a real fluctuation target in the high probability precursor state, the special symbol Z1 is 1%, the special symbol Z2 is 69%, and the special symbol Z3 is 30 as the small hit symbol. It is determined with a probability of% (see FIG. 8 (c)).

At this time, when the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small hit symbol, the time-saving gaming state ends with the end of the small hit game, and as a result, the gaming state shifts to the most dominant state.

In this way, since the player shifts to the most dominant state by winning a specific small hit, the player is compared to the case where the player shifts to the most dominant state only when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (100 times). Therefore, a sense of expectation and a sense of tension are always given.

In the above-mentioned high-probability precursor state, high-probability time-saving state, and low-probability time-saving state, there is a probability of winning a small hit with a probability of about 1 / 3.45. Therefore, even in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, the small hit game is frequently executed as in the most dominant state. However, in the high-probability precursor state, the high-probability time-saving state, and the low-probability time-saving state, the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. Further, as will be described in detail later, the normal game state is maintained in the time-saving game state even during the small hit game. Therefore, although the second big winning opening 128 is opened during the small hit game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable starting port 120B is provided above the second large winning opening 128, and in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the first variable starting opening 120B is the second large winning opening. It is much longer than the opening time of the mouth 128. Therefore, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, most of the game balls flowing down the second gaming area 116b enter the first variable starting port 120B and enter the second large winning opening 128. Almost no game ball enters. As a result, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, unlike the most dominant state, even if a right-handed hit is made during the game, the number of game balls gradually decreases.

As described above, when the game progresses according to the actual fluctuation target according to the original game performance, when the big hit is won, the game state after the big role game is the low probability time saving state, the high probability time saving state, and the high probability precursor state. Set to either. In the high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability precursor state, it is common that the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, the high-accuracy time-saving state continues until the next big hit is won, while the high-accuracy precursor state is a game by winning a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) or skipping the time. The difference is that the state is transferred to the most dominant state.

Further, in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is set to 1 second, whereas in the high-accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is 3 to 10 seconds. It differs in that it is set within the range (see FIG. 10 (b)). That is, the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy time-shortening state is set shorter than the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy precursor state.

Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and at the time of loss is relatively short, so that the actual fluctuation target can be digested at high speed until the big hit is won. Although detailed description is omitted, in the variation time of the special symbol, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is performed on the sub-control board 330. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is also relatively short. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, as long as the special 1 hold continues to be stored, the special 1 hold (variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c) will continue to be digested at high speed, and the time until the jackpot is won will be reduced. It can be shortened, and the player can play the game until the next big hit without making the player feel stress (reduced).

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and at the time of loss is relatively long, but in the sub-control board 330, an effect of whether or not to shift to the most dominant state is performed. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the player will shift to the highest superior state.

In this way, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, even if a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) is won, it does not shift to the highest superior state, but the average fluctuation time is set short, so that the next big hit The time to win the prize can be shortened, and the stress on the player can be reduced. In addition, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the average fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, but the fluctuation time can be used to produce an effect as to whether or not to shift to the most dominant state. It is possible to give a person a sense of expectation and a sense of tension.

As described above, the high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability precursor state, which are common in that the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, are provided, and the fluctuation of the high-probability time-saving state is provided. By making the average of time shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state, it is possible to provide new playability.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a transition of the gaming state when the gaming is not properly performed according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 and the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162 are simultaneously performed in parallel. At this time, if there is a possibility that the player may be disadvantaged as a result of the large winning combination lottery being held due to a hold other than the actual fluctuation target, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big winning combination lottery is performed by the hold other than the real change target, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, the big hit by the hold other than the real change target may be confirmed. In this case, the gaming state changes as shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, the main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-mentioned playability will be described.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine state flag according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game can proceed is managed by the game machine state flag. One of six types of flag values of 00H to 05H is set in the gaming machine status flag. The flag value = 00H of the gaming machine status flag indicates a game-enabled state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the game progress is controlled, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is played. It will be stopped.

The flag value = 01H of the gaming machine status flag indicates the setting change status, and when the gaming machine status flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates the setting confirmation status, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and the registered setting value is set. It will be possible to confirm. The flag value = 03H of the gaming machine status flag indicates an abnormal setting state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the game is stopped because the registered setting value is abnormal. The flag value = 04H of the gaming machine status flag indicates the RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value = 05H of the gaming machine status flag indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing is performed according to the gaming machine status flag.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 300)
FIG. 19 is a first flowchart illustrating a CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 20 illustrates a CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a second flowchart to be done.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a boot program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. The main control board 300 is provided with a power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, a power supply cutoff warning signal is output from the power supply cutoff detection circuit. If the power cutoff warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S100-3, and if the power cutoff notice signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a process necessary for permitting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag before the power is cut off in the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off (normal) and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and the checksum are normal, the process is transferred to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either or both are not normal, the process is transferred to step S100-25. ..

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the address that does not include the set value and the gaming machine status flag to the start address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button is pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process is transferred to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process is transferred to step S100-19. ..

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (gamable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, if it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-21, and if it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets 02H (setting confirmation state) in the gaming machine status flag. That is, when the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is turned on, and the power is normally turned on while the RAM clear button is not pressed, the setting confirmation state is set.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the clear target at the time of power recovery, which is an area after the start address set in step S100-15 of the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an out-of-area read / write check process for checking and clearing the read / write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets the address including the set value and the gaming machine status flag to the start address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read / write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read / write memory in the step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the process is normal, the process is transferred to step S100-37, and if it is determined that the process is not normal, the process is transferred to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register and shifts the processing to steps S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, if it is determined that 02H is set, the process is transferred to step S100-39, and if it is determined that 02H is not set, the process is transferred to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (gamable state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-43, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-45. Here, at least that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the middle frame 104 is open, and the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s as the setting change condition. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the clear target at the time of clearing the RAM in the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to steps S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (storing the RAM clear designation command in the transmission buffer) of a payout command (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (gamable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process is transferred to step S110, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process is transferred to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group set processing. The subcommand group set processing will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300a performs a subcommand set process for transmitting a predetermined command to the subcontrol board 330.

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt cycle.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for disabling interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the ending value of the winning symbol random number. That is, when the hit symbol random number goes around from the initial value update random number for the hit symbol random number to the initial value update random number -1 for the hit symbol random number by the update process of the hit symbol random number described later, the hit symbol random number is obtained at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for transmitting a subcommand stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. In the following, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variation effect pattern are collectively referred to as a variation effect random number.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a subcommand group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a subcommand set process for transmitting a predetermined command to the subcontrol board 330.

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process for setting a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value specification command setting process for setting a setting value specification command indicating a registration setting value in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 hold designation command setting process for setting a special figure 1 hold designation command indicating the number of special 1 hold in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 hold designation command setting process for setting a special figure 2 hold designation command indicating the number of special 2 hold designations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number-of-times command setting process for setting a number-of-times command indicating the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state specification command setting process for setting a variation pattern selection state specification command indicating a variation pattern selection state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase designation command setting process for setting a special figure phase designation command indicating a special game management phase in the transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is in the special symbol change waiting state. As a result, if it is determined that the state is waiting for the special symbol change, the process is transferred to step S110-21, and if it is determined that the state is not the state of waiting for the special symbol change, the subcommand group set process is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the subcommand group set processing.

Next, the interrupt processing in the main control board 300 will be described. Here, save processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing when the power is turned off will be described.

(Evacuation processing when the power of the main control board 300 is turned off (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process) when the power is turned off in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power failure save process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power cutoff warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power cutoff warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-11, and if it is determined that the power supply cutoff warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-7. ..

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt, and ends the save process when the power is turned off.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes an output port clearing process for stopping the output of the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes a checksum setting process for calculating and saving the checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes the RAM protection setting process necessary for prohibiting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined number of times of power failure detection signal detection to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power cutoff warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-17, and if it is determined that the power supply cutoff warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-23. ..

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S100) described above.

When the power is actually cut off, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is stopped while looping from step S300-17 to step S300-25.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds in the reference example of simultaneous rotation, hereinafter referred to as “4 ms”). Then, when the clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol hold display 164, and the second special symbol hold. A dynamic port output process for controlling lighting of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol hold display 170, the right-handed notification display 172, and the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various input port information and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (gamable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process is transferred to step S400-15, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process is transferred to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 03H (setting abnormality state) or more. As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process is transferred to step S400-27, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process is transferred to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes the setting-related processing and shifts the processing to step S400-27. The setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are subtracted each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 300 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when the value reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
Similar to step S100-61, the main CPU 300a executes the update process of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is added and updated by 1, and if the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to 0. If the random number counter makes one round, the random number counter at that time is added. Update the initial value for the winning symbol random number Update the random number from the value of the random number.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the hardware random number updated by the hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300 is used as the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number. The hardware random number generator updates both the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number according to a certain rule, automatically changes the random number sequence every time the random number sequence goes around, and sets the start value every time the system is reset. I am changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed start port detection switch 120As, a first variable start port detection switch 120Bs, a second start port detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a normal operation port detection switch 125s, and a first prize-winning port detection switch. In 126s, the switch management process for determining whether or not a signal is input from the second large winning opening detection switch 128s is executed. The details of this switch management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first major winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second major winning opening detection switch 128s. The winning opening switch process for adding the counter for controlling the winning ball to be performed is executed.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold display 164, a second special symbol hold display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol hold display 170. , The LED display setting process for setting the display data for lighting control of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed notification indicator 172 in the output buffer corresponding to each common is executed.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first prize-winning port solenoid 126c, and the second prize-winning port solenoid 128c, and executes a solenoid output image synthesis process for storing in the output port buffer. ..

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes a port output process for outputting the value of the common output buffer stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for disabling interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 is common. Executes the performance display monitor control process to be set in the output buffer. In the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated every predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may switch and display the base ratio of the current period and the base ratio of the period before that at predetermined time intervals. Further, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched according to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a returns the register and ends the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating the setting-related process (S450) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 01H, the process is transferred to step S450-3, and if it is determined that it is not 01H, the process is transferred to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set value stored in the set value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed (whether the RAM clear operation signal is input). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed, the process is transferred to step S450-7, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is not pressed, the process is transferred to step S450-9. ..

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the set value of the processing area is in the range of 1 to 6. As a result, if it is determined that the set value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process is transferred to step S450-13, and if it is determined that the set value is not in the range of 1 to 6, the process is performed in step S450-11. To move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area in the set value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related process is terminated, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process is moved to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end specification command indicating the end of the setting-related processing in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process of FIG. 21. That is, when the setting-related processing is executed, at the end of the execution, the model command, the setting value specification command, the special figure 1 hold specification command, the special figure 2 hold designation command, the number of times command, the variation pattern selection state specification command, and the special figure phase. The designated command and the customer waiting designated command will be transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (gamable state) in the gaming machine status flag, and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the CPU initials. In the conversion process (FIG. 19), 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag. After that, timer interrupt processing is executed, but since 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag, all processing related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in FIG. 23). ) Is stopped and the setting related processing is executed.

The setting-related processing is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related processing, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as the setting change operation of the registered setting value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) for accepting the setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is one of the setting values provided in a plurality of stages according to the setting change operation. Can be switched to.

Then, when the setting change switch 180s is switched off while 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag, the setting change processing is completed and 00H (gaming possible state) is set in the gaming machine status flag. It is set. As a result, the process related to the progress of the game can be executed from the next timer interrupt process.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, the setting value corresponding to the registration setting value is specified in the subcommand group set processing after the acceptance of the RAM clear button pressing operation, that is, the registration setting value setting change operation is completed. The command is sent to the sub-control board 330. On the other hand, the setting value designation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 330 while the setting change operation is being accepted. In this way, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value specification command is transmitted when the acceptance of the setting change operation is completed and the game progresses to a state in which the setting value specification command is not transmitted. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk that the registered setting value is illegally acquired.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) can be switched. Then, when 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag, the setting-related processing can be executed and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since the setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, the setting value specification command is not transmitted while the game is in progress, and the risk of illegal acquisition of the registered setting value is reduced. Will be done.

Next, among the timer interrupt processes described above, the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, and the normal game management process in step S700 will be described in detail.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch is not detected, the process is transferred to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes the gate passage process based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 124. The details of this gate passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether it is the time when the normal figure operation port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether the game ball enters the normal figure operation port 125 and the detection signal from the normal figure operation port detection switch 125s is turned on. .. As a result, if it is determined that the normal figure operating port detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S510, and if it is determined that the normal figure operating port detection switch is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-5. To move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes the gate passage process based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing operation port 125.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first fixed start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball enters the first fixed start port 120A and the detection signal is input from the first fixed start port detection switch 120As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first fixed start port detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S520, and if it is determined that the first fixed start port detection switch is not on, step S500-7. Move the process to.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. The details of the process of passing through the first starting port will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first variable start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball enters the first variable start port 120B and the detection signal is input from the first variable start port detection switch 120Bs. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first variable start port detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable start port detection switch is not on, step S500-9. Move the process to.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. The details of the process of passing through the first starting port will be described later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether it is the time when the second start port detection switch is turned on, that is, whether the game ball enters the second start port 122 and the detection signal is input from the second start port detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second start port detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S530, and if it is determined that the second start port detection switch is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-11. To move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 122. The details of this second starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a is at the time of detecting that the large winning opening detection switch is on, that is, the game ball enters the first large winning opening 126 or the second special winning opening 128, and the first large winning opening detection switch 126s or the second It is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S540, and if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is not detected, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S540)
When the main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128, and determines that the game ball has been properly entered. Is to execute a large winning opening passing process for transmitting a large winning opening entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128 to the sub-control board 330. The details of this large winning opening passing process will be described later.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is the maximum value or more, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and if it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value. The process is transferred to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired winning determination random number among the four storage units in the normal figure reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number acquired in step S510-1 in the target storage unit calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating the hold of the normal figure, which indicates the number of hold of the normal figure stored in the hold storage area of the normal figure, and ends the gate passing process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as a special symbol identification value. The special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the hold type is special 1 hold or special 2 hold, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 hold, and the special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 hold.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process and ends the first start port passage process. It should be noted that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a module common to the second start port passage process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the explanation of the second start port passage process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as a special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process described later, and ends the second start port passage process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a common module in the first start port passage process (step S520) and the second start port passage process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the target special symbol reserved ball number. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. If the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, if it is determined that the value is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated, and if it is determined that the value is not equal to or higher than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired jackpot determination random number among the storage units in the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the hit symbol random number updated in step S400-13, and the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and obtains the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69. Store in the target storage unit calculated in.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure hold designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, the special figure 1 hold designation command is set based on the counter value (special 1 hold number) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter, and based on the counter value (special 2 hold number) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter. Set the special figure 2 hold specification command. As a result, each time the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the special 1 hold number and the special 2 hold number are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs an effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this acquisition-time effect determination process, the result of the large winning combination lottery, the variation pattern number, and the like are provisionally determined, and a look-ahead designation command according to the result of the provisional determination is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. The effect determination process at the time of acquisition will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition-time effect determination process (step S536) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game is in the high probability game state or the low probability game state. Specifically, in the low-probability gaming state, the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 6) is selected, and in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIG. 7). ) Is selected. Then, based on the selected table and the big hit determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13, a special symbol hit tentative determination process for tentatively determining either a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is performed.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol tentative determination process for tentatively determining the special symbol. Here, if the result of the provisional large winning combination lottery in step S536-1 (result derived by the provisional determination process for special symbol hit) is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Load the winning symbol random number, winning type (big hit or small hit), and hold type, select the corresponding winning symbol random number judgment table (see Fig. 8), and extract and extract the special symbol judgment data. Save the special symbol judgment data (type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol). Further, when the result of the provisional large role lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, the special symbol determination data (type of the lost symbol) for the loss corresponding to the hold type is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a selects a variation pattern random number determination table according to the special symbol probability state flag, the hold type, the number of fluctuations in the game state, and the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) extracted in step S536-3. , Set the selected variation pattern random number judgment table.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S536-7 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead designation variation pattern command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-9 in the transmission buffer, and ends the acquisition-time effect determination process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating the large winning opening passing process (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S540-1)
If the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that it is time to detect the large winning opening detection switch on, the main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase. As will be described in detail later, the special game management phase indicates the stage of the special game execution process, that is, the progress of the special game, and is updated according to the stage of the special game execution process.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase loaded in step S540-1 indicates a stage of execution processing equal to or higher than the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening. The special game management phase is provided with nine stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H corresponds to the execution processing stage equal to or higher than the pre-processing for opening the big winning opening. Since the big role game or the small hit game is executed when the special game management phase is 01H to 08H, here, it is determined whether the big role game or the small hit game is currently in progress. If it is determined that the special game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing higher than the large winning opening pre-opening process, the process is moved to step S540-5, and the special game management phase is the large winning opening pre-opening process. If it is determined that it does not indicate the stage of the above execution processing, the processing is transferred to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a large winning opening entry command indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128 in the transmission buffer, and ends the large winning opening passing process. ..

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process on the assumption that the entry of the game ball into the first special winning opening 126 or the second special winning opening 128 is inappropriate, and ends the large winning opening passing process.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a special game management phase according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the special game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the normal operation opening. A normal game triggered by the entry of a game ball into 125 progresses in parallel. The processes related to the special game are executed stepwise and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each process related to the special game by the special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 32, a plurality of special game control modules for executing and controlling special games are stored in the main ROM 300b, and a special game management phase is associated with each of these special game control modules. .. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "special symbol variation processing" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H". Is called a module for executing the "large winning opening opening pre-processing", and when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H", the "large winning opening opening control process" is executed. Is called, and if the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H", the module for executing the "large winning opening closure valid process" is called, and the special game management phase is "04H". "Or" 08H ", the module for executing the" large winning opening end wait process "is called.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects a special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 to start the process.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol variation process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol change waiting process. This special symbol change waiting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38.

(Step S620)
The main CPU 300a executes a process during special symbol change. This special symbol change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

(Step S630)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol stop symbol display process. This special symbol stop symbol display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

FIG. 35 is a first flowchart illustrating a special symbol fluctuation waiting process (step S610) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 36 is a special flow chart in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a 2nd flowchart explaining the symbol change waiting process (step S610).

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the suspended flag is on. As will be described in detail later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 during the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160. In this case, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the small hit game is executed, but during this time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is interrupted. After the small hit game is completed, the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is restarted. The interrupted flag is turned on when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, and the symbol is being changed and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. Here, if it is determined that the suspended flag is on, the process is transferred to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the suspended flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S610-5.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a process for resuming the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160, and shifts the process to step S610-51 of FIG.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special 1 hold number is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of special 1 hold is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S610-7, and if it is determined that the number of special 1 hold is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S610-51. ..

(Step S610-7)
Whether the main CPU 300a is displaying the fluctuation of the symbol based on the special 1 hold or the symbol based on the special 1 hold is displaying the stop (timekeeping of the stop display time) on the first special symbol display 160. To judge. As a result, if it is determined that the variable display is in progress or the stop display is in progress, the process is transferred to step S610-51, and if it is determined that the variable display is not in progress and the stop display is not in progress. The process is transferred to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area to one storage unit having a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the special 1 hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 1 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol hold ball count counter corresponding to the special 1 hold is subtracted by "1", and the special 1 hold is subtracted by "1". Set the hold decrement command in the send buffer.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol variation is being displayed, the process is transferred to step S610-17, and if it is determined that the symbol variation display is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol hit determination process for performing a large winning combination lottery. This special symbol hit detection process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, when the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S611 is a big hit or a small hit, the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or the small hit symbol is loaded. Select the random number judgment table, extract the special symbol judgment data, and save the extracted special symbol judgment data (type of jackpot symbol). Further, if the result of the large winning combination lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for the loss is saved. Then, after saving the special symbol determination data, the symbol type specification command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S610-19, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit is within the range of the small hit. As a result, if it is determined that the hit is within the range of the small hit, the process is transferred to step S610-21, and if it is determined that the process is outside the range of the small hit, the process is transferred to step S610-23.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small hit symbol random number determination table, extracts the special symbol determination data, and extracts the special symbol determination data (small). The type of winning symbol) is saved.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the lost symbol, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. That is, when the second special symbol display 162 is performing the variable display of the symbol in which the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is always displayed on the first special symbol display 160. Only the variable display of the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed will be performed.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-15, step S610-21, and step S610-23. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining the variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-27)
The main CPU 300a loads the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the fluctuation time with reference to the fluctuation time determination table. Then, the determined fluctuation time is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-15 and confirms the type of the big hit symbol. do. Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, the game state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set after the end of the big role game are determined, and the determination result is used as the special symbol probability state reserve flag and the time reduction state reserve. Save to the flag, high-probability number-cutting spare counter, and time-saving number-cutting spare counter. If the lost symbol is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in order to start variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled to be lit. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be turned on at the start of the variable display of the symbol is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter is provided separately with a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162. Here, a counter value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes the count-cutting management process. Here, processing is performed to end the time-saving gaming state according to the number of fluctuations. This number-cutting management process will be described later.

(Step S610-35)
The main CPU 300a sets a number-of-times command indicating the remaining number of times (actual remaining number of times) until the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-37)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

(Step S610-51)
As shown in FIG. 36, the main CPU 300a determines whether or not the special 2 hold number is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the special 2 hold number is 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S610-53, and if it is determined that the special 2 hold number is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S610-85. ..

(Step S610-53)
In the second special symbol display 162, the main CPU 300a is displaying the fluctuation of the symbol based on the special 2 hold, or the symbol based on the special 2 hold is displaying the stop (during the time of the stop display time). To judge. As a result, if it is determined that the variation display is in progress or the stop display is in progress, the process is transferred to step S610-85, and if it is determined that the variation display is not in progress and the stop display is not in progress, step S610 is performed. Move processing to -55.

(Step S610-55)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the special 2 hold stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure hold storage area to one storage unit having a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the special 2 hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 2 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol hold ball count counter corresponding to the special 2 hold is subtracted by "1", and the special 2 hold is subtracted by "1". Set the hold decrement command in the send buffer.

(Step S610-57)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 160. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol variation is being displayed, the process is transferred to step S610-63, and if it is determined that the symbol variation display is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game is in the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state, and sets the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table. A large winning combination lottery is selected, and a special symbol hit determination process for storing the lottery result is executed.

(Step S610-61)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, when the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S611 is a big hit or a small hit, the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or the small hit symbol is loaded. Select the random number judgment table, extract the special symbol judgment data, and save the extracted special symbol judgment data (type of jackpot symbol). Further, if the result of the large winning combination lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for the loss is saved. Then, after saving the special symbol determination data, the symbol type specification command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-63)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S610-65, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S611.

(Step S610-65)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit is within the range of the small hit. As a result, if it is determined that the hit is within the range of the small hit, the process is transferred to step S610-67, and if it is determined that the process is outside the range of the small hit, the process is transferred to step S610-69.

(Step S610-67)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the corresponding small hit symbol random number determination table, extracts the special symbol determination data, and extracts the special symbol determination data (small). The type of winning symbol) is saved.

(Step S610-69)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol determination data related to the lost symbol, and sets the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data in the transmission buffer. That is, when the first special symbol display 160 is performing the variable display of the symbol in which the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the second special symbol display 162 always has the small hit symbol or the lost symbol. Only the variable display of the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed will be performed.

(Step S610-71)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in steps S610-61, step S610-67, and step S610-69.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining the variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-73)
The main CPU 300a loads the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the fluctuation time with reference to the fluctuation time determination table. Then, the determined fluctuation time is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-75)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, the main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-61 and loads the big hit symbol. Check the type of. Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, the game state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set after the end of the big role game are determined, and the determination result is used as the special symbol probability state reserve flag and the time reduction state reserve. Save to the flag, high-probability number-cutting spare counter, and time-saving number-cutting spare counter. If the lost symbol is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-77)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the second special symbol display 162 in order to start variable display of the symbol. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segments constituting the second special symbol display 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is controlled to be lit. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be turned on at the start of the variable display of the symbol is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes a number-cutting management process described later.

(Step S610-81)
The main CPU 300a sets the number-of-times command indicating the counter value (the remaining number of times until the high-accuracy number becomes 0) updated in step S610-79 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-83)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

(Step S610-85)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined customer waiting process when neither the first special symbol display 160 nor the second special symbol display 162 is in the process of displaying the change of the symbol and the stop display, and waits for the change of the special symbol. End the process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol collision detection process (S611) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set value of the set value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registration set value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, if it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process is transferred to step S611-11, and if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process is transferred to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets 03H (setting abnormal state) in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting error state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol collision determination process. When this setting error status command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, a notification indicating that the setting is abnormal is given.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the jackpot determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in steps S611-1 and S611-3, and sets the lower limit value and the upper limit value when determining a jackpot or a small hit, respectively.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the big hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (big win lottery) for determining whether or not a big hit or a small hit has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 as the determination information, and ends the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the currently set gaming state, and determines whether the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state, the process is transferred to step S612-7, and if it is determined that the normal gaming state is not the reduced working hours gaming state, the processing is transferred to step S612-5.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation pattern random number determination table selection process that selects and sets a corresponding variation pattern random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the hold type, and the determined special symbol type.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a increments the total fluctuation count counter. It should be noted that the total fluctuation count counter is the number of fluctuation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 (first fluctuation count) after being set to the time-saving gaming state, and the symbol on the second special symbol display 162. The total number of fluctuations, which is the sum of the number of fluctuations displayed (second number of fluctuations), is counted. This total number of fluctuations is updated by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the symbol is started in the time-saving game state.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not it is the start of the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if it is determined that it is the start of the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162, the process is transferred to step S612-11, and the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162 is started. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process is moved to step S612-5.

When the symbol variation display is started on the first special symbol display 160 in the time-saving game state, the variation pattern random number determination table is selected based on the total number of variations updated in step S612-7. The Rukoto.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a increments the second fluctuation count counter. The second fluctuation count counter counts the number of symbol fluctuation displays (second fluctuation count) on the second special symbol display 162 after being set to the time-saving gaming state. This second variation number is updated by 1 each time the symbol variation display is started on the second special symbol display 162 when the time-saving gaming state is set.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of second fluctuations updated in step S612-11 is 4 or less. As a result, if it is determined that the value is 4 or less, the process is transferred to step S612-15, and if it is determined that the value is not 4 or less, the process is transferred to step S612-5.

If the symbol variation display is started on the second special symbol display 162 and the second variation count is 5 or more in the time-saving gaming state, the total number of fluctuations updated in step S612-7 above. The variation pattern random number determination table is selected based on. According to the table I selected at this time, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a selects and sets a special table as the variation pattern random number determination table.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a is based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table set in step S612-5 or step S612-15 and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 or step S610-55. Determine the variation pattern number.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-17 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating the number-of-times cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of time reductions, that is, the counter value of the time reduction count cut counter is larger than 0. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is larger than 0, the process is moved to step S613-3, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the number cut management process is terminated.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time reduction counter.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S613-3 whether the counter value (number of time reductions) has been updated to 0. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the process is moved to step S613-7, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is not 0, the number cut management process is terminated.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to set the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, after the normal gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state at the start of the fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the time-saving number (here, 50 or 100 times). The Rukoto. For example, if it is set to the high probability precursor state, it will be set to the highest advantage state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time saving end flag and ends the number-of-times cut management process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a process during special symbol change in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value. The processing target identification value is for identifying whether to execute the processing related to the special 1 hold or the process related to the special 2 hold when executing each of the following processes. When "00H" is set as the processing target identification value, the process related to the special 1 hold is executed, and when "01H" is set as the processing target identification value, the process related to the special 2 hold is executed. Is executed. The various counters and timers that appear in the explanations of the special symbol change processing and the special symbol stop symbol display processing are provided with special 1 hold and special 2 hold, and the following steps S620-5 to In the process of step S620-23, the process is performed on the process target (counter, timer, etc.) corresponding to the process target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the hold to be processed is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if the variation is displayed, the process is transferred to step S620-5, and if the variation is not displayed, the process is transferred to step S620-25.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of updating the special symbol variation base counter. The counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is set so as to make one round in a predetermined cycle (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, the predetermined counter value is set. The counter value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-5 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-9, and if the counter value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-13.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process for subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-27 or step S610-73.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-9 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-19, and if the timer value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-13.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the current timer value is used. "1" Updates the timer value to the subtracted value.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-17, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the step is performed. The process is transferred to S620-25.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and shifts the process to step S620-25. As a result, each segment constituting the 7-segment is sequentially turned on at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-25 or S610-71 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol, in the special game timer.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, when it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the processing during the special symbol change is terminated, and when it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S620-27.

(Step S620-27)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the processing target identification value, and shifts the processing to step S620-3.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol related to the hold type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. .. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display is in progress, the process is transferred to step S630-5, and if it is determined that the stop display is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-23 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is transferred to step S630-37, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S630 is performed. Move the process to -7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big winning combination lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that there is a loss, the process is transferred to step S630-29, and if it is determined that there is no loss, the process is transferred to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes the symbol forced stop process. This symbol forced stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process for updating the game state. Here, the game state is set to the initial state when the special symbol displayed as stopped is a big hit symbol, and when the special symbol displayed as stopped is a small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessory operation ram set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-15, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter. .. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the large role game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory, and by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory at the start of each round game, the current number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated. The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big role game, the process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15, and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the major game to the sub-control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" when starting a large role game, and updates the special game management phase to "05H" when starting a small hit game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase updated in step S630-23 is "01H", that is, whether it is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that the special game management phase is "01H", the process is transferred to step S630-27, and if it is determined that the special game management phase is not "01H", the process proceeds to step S630-29. Move the process.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this processing, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big role game (opening). Although a plurality of signals output from the game information output terminal board 312 are provided, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be described here.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for confirming the game state when the special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is confirmed.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the time saving end flag is turned on. As described above, the time saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 39 at the start of the fluctuation when the time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, when the time saving end flag is turned on here, the normal gaming state is changed from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state due to the time saving omission at the start of the 50th or 100th fluctuation in the high probability precursor state. If it was done. That is, here, it is determined that the time reduction end flag is turned on only when the fluctuation at the time reduction is completed. If it is determined that the time reduction end flag is on, the process is transferred to step S630-33, and if it is determined that the time reduction end flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S630-37.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, the jackpot signal is output during the major role game or the time-saving game state.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time saving end flag.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, if it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the special symbol stop symbol display processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S630-39. ..

(Step S630-39)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing target identification value, and shifts the processing to step S630-3.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a symbol forced stop process (step S631) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol during the stop display (corresponding) is a small hit symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the process is transferred to step S631-3, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a small hit symbol, the process is transferred to step S631-11.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing target identification value is 00H, that is, whether the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the first special symbol display 160. As a result, if it is determined that the processing target identification value is 00H, the processing is transferred to step S631-11, and if it is determined that the processing target identification value is not 00H, the processing is transferred to step S631-5.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol during the variable display (the other) is the jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S631-11, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S631-7.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the suspended flag.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation interruption process for interrupting the variation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160, and ends the symbol forced stop process. Here, a process is performed in which the remaining time of the variable time and the information related to the special symbol are temporarily saved in a predetermined storage area.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of forcibly stopping the lost symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 on which the symbol is variablely displayed, and ends the symbol forced stop process.

By the above processing, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol is displayed if the jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. A lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the vessel 160. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. 1 The variable display on the special symbol display 160 will be temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This large winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the special game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S630-19 or the like is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the pre-processing is terminated. The process is transferred to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening to transmit the opening start of the large winning opening (start of the round game) to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes a large winning opening opening / closing switching process. This large winning opening opening / closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value (“02H” or “06H”), and ends the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening / closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number (the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening during one round game). As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the special electric accessory operation ram set table, and energizes the first special winning opening solenoid 126c and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter. The solenoid control data for control and the timer data which is the energization time or the energization stop time are extracted.

(Step S641-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S641-3, the main CPU 300a starts or stops energization of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c. The winning port solenoid energization control process is executed. By executing this large winning opening solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled in steps S400-23 and S400-25. It will be.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. The timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time of one large winning opening.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a is in the energization start state of the first prize opening solenoid 126c or the second prize opening solenoid 128c, that is, in step S641-5, the first prize opening solenoid 126c or the second prize opening solenoid 128c It is determined whether the control process for starting the energization has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the energization start state is determined, the process is transferred to step S641-11, and if it is determined that the energization start state is not established, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the special winning opening opening / closing switching process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S641-7 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is transferred to step S650-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S650 is performed. Move the process to -3.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S650-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S641.

(Step S641)
If it is determined in step S650-3 that the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count is not the upper limit of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S641. do.

(Step S650-5)
In the main CPU 300a, whether the counter value of the large winning opening winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has not reached the specified number, that is, the same number as the maximum winning number in one round in the large winning opening. It is determined whether or not the game ball of is entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the large winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process is moved to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a executes the large winning opening closing process necessary for closing the large winning opening by stopping the energization of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value (“03H” or “07H”) obtained by adding 01H to the current value.

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a command for designating the closing of the winning opening, which indicates that the winning opening is closed, in the transmission buffer, and ends the special winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special game management phase is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S650-9 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the large winning opening closing valid process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the step is performed. The process is transferred to S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, that is, whether the round game of the preset number of times is completed. .. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, the process is transferred to step S660-9, and it is determined that they do not match. The process is transferred to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H". When the special game management phase is 07H, that is, during the control of the small hit game, the number of round games of the small hit game is "1", so that it is always determined to be YES in step S660-3. The process does not shift to that step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the large winning opening closing valid process. As a result, the next round game will be started.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special game timer.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value (“04H” or “08H”) obtained by adding 01H to the current value.

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the special winning opening closing valid processing.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating the large winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the large winning opening end wait process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the timer value is determined to be "0". The process is transferred to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small hit game is completed. As a result, if it is determined that the special game management phase is "08H", the process is transferred to step S670-11, and if it is determined that the special game management phase is not "08H", the process is performed in step S670-5. To move.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting a game state after the end of the major game. Here, the game state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set in the spare area in step S610-29 or step S610-75 are loaded, and the setting of each flag and the counter value are set as the game state after the big role game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S670-5 whether the normal gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that the non-time saving gaming state is set, the process is transferred to step S670-9, and if it is determined that the non-time saving gaming state is not set, the process is transferred to step S670-21.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the maximum superior state is set after the big role game, the output of the big hit signal is stopped at the end of the big role game.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a high-probability precursor state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state). As a result, if it is determined that the state is a high probability precursor state, the process is transferred to step S670-13, and if it is determined that the state is not a high probability precursor state, the process is transferred to step S670-21.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the stop-displayed small hit symbol is the special symbol Z1. As a result, if it is determined that it is the special symbol Z1, the process is transferred to step S670-15, and if it is determined that it is not the special symbol Z1, the process is transferred to step S670-21.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to change the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in the high probability precursor state, the game state is changed to the most dominant state at the end of the small hit game.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process for resetting the time reduction counter.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal board 312. That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and set to the highest superior state after the small hit game, the output of the big hit signal is stopped at the end of the small hit game.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting a game state set after the end of the major game.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the number-of-times commands corresponding to the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the variable display of the symbol is restarted.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a normal game management phase according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the process related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing operating port 125 is repeated stepwise and repeatedly. However, in the main control board 300, each process related to such a normal game is managed by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of normal game control modules for executing and controlling normal games are stored in the main ROM 300b, and a normal game management phase is associated with each of these normal game control modules. .. Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", the module is called. The module for executing "normal symbol change processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "02H", the module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display processing" is called and normal. When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing "pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal". When the module for executing the "electric accessory winning opening open control process" is called and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "ordinary electric accessory winning opening closing effective process" Is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a normal game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects a normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 and starts processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the control time of the normal game.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol fluctuation waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter, and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol hold is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the normal figure hold (hit-determined random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal figure hold storage area to the storage unit having one smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the normal figure hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the normal drawing hold stored in the 1st storage unit is transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this normal symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball counter is subtracted by "1", and a normal symbol hold reduction designation command indicating that the normal symbol hold is subtracted by "1" is transmitted. Set in the buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the hit determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, performs a general drawing lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on in the case of a hit, and the normal symbol display 168 is turned off in the case of a loss. Let me. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally turned on. For example, if a winner is won, the normal symbol stop symbol number is "0". Is determined, and in the case of loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current gaming state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol fluctuation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S710-3 and the normal symbol fluctuation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display 168 in order to start variable display of the normal symbol. When, for example, "0" is set as the counter value in the normal symbol display symbol counter, the normal symbol display 168 is lit and controlled, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol display is displayed. The device 168 is turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating a hold of a normal figure, which indicates the number of hold of the normal figure stored in the hold storage area of the normal figure.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a transmits a normal symbol designation command based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (win symbol or lost symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Set to.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a process during normal symbol change in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S710-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process is transferred to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that measures the lighting time and the extinguishing time of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the current timer value is used. "1" Updates the timer value to the subtracted value.

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process is transferred to step S720-7, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the process is performed. Normal symbol change processing is terminated.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, the counter value is updated to indicate lighting, and the counter value indicating lighting of the normal symbol display 168 is updated. If it is, the counter value indicating that the light is turned off is updated, and the processing during the normal symbol change is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeatedly turns on and off (blinks) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to be turned on or off, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating a stop of a normal symbol indicating that the stop display of a normal symbol has started.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S720-11 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the timer value is determined to be "0". The process is transferred to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the drawing lottery.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the general drawing lottery is a hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a hit, the process is transferred to step S730-9, and if it is determined that it is not a hit (it is a loss), the process is transferred to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, when the normal game management process based on the normal figure hold of 1 is completed and the normal figure hold is stored, the process for starting the variable display of the normal symbol based on the next hold is performed. It becomes.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the open / close control pattern table, and saves the time before the opening of the normal power as a timer value in the normal game timer.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening / closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S730-9 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In that case, the process is transferred to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes an ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process. The process of switching the opening / closing of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a process of switching the opening / closing of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory in the main control board 300 according to the reference example of simultaneous rotation.

(Step S741-1)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number (the number of times of opening / closing of the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B during one opening / closing control). Determine if it exists. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the processing for switching the opening / closing of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the processing is performed in step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the open / close control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. Stop control data) and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal power closing effective time = pause time) of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c are extracted.

(Step S741-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, or stops energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. Object Solenoid Energization control processing is executed. By executing this ordinary electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is controlled in steps S400-23 and S400-25.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first variable starting port 120B once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the energization start state of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is performed, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is performed in step S741-5. As a result, if it is determined that the energization start state is determined, the process is transferred to steps S741-11, and if it is determined that the energization start state is not established, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening control process is executed when the ordinary game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S741-7 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process is transferred to step S750-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S750 is performed. Move the process to -3.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S750-7, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S741.

(Step S741)
If it is determined in step S750-3 that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count is not the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S741. do.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a is controlling the opening / closing of the first variable starting port 120B once whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has not reached the specified number. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls in the game has been entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process is moved to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a executes the ordinary electric accessory closing process necessary for closing the first variable starting port 120B by stopping the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is closed.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power effective state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an ordinary electric accessory winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S750-9 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In that case, the process is transferred to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal game end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid processing.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening end wait process is executed when the ordinary game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In that case, the process is transferred to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol is restarted. Next, as a production reference example, a specific production that can be executed by the above-mentioned type 1 gaming machine, type 2 gaming machine, and a simultaneous turning machine, and specific processing related to the production will be described.

<Production reference example>
FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a reachless variation pattern according to an effect reference example. As described above, when the big winning combination lottery is performed on the main control board 300, the variable effect of notifying the result of the big winning combination lottery is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, that is, over the variable time of the special symbol. In this variable effect, various background images are displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background image. During the variable effect, the sound is output from the sound output device 206 along with the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, the effect lighting device 204 is lighting-controlled, and the effect accessory device 202 is used. Although it is movably controlled, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation effect according to the production reference example is roughly classified into a reach-less variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are superimposed and displayed on the background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), it is assumed that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the result of the large winning combination lottery is a loss. In this state, when a new variable display of the special symbol is performed, the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variablely displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (b) with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Start (scroll display). The downward white arrow in the figure indicates that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scrolled in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the effect symbol 210c different from the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), at substantially the same timing as when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. , The effect symbol 210b is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big winning combination lottery result by the final stop display mode of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c at this time.

FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern according to the effect reference example. In the production reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is roughly classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a development reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern. Similar to the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern starts the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is shown in FIG. 59 (a). As shown, the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the same effect symbol 210c as the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode in which the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are stopped and displayed in the main effect display unit 200a, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the effect symbols are displayed in the main effect display unit 200a. "Reach" is displayed by superimposing on 210a and 210c. It should be noted that a plurality of types of reach modes are provided, and the same effect symbols 210a and 210c on which any number "1" to "9" is written are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the shape of the effect symbols 210a and 210c is different from that before the reach mode, and the variable display is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), finally, the effect symbols 210b different from the effect symbols 210a and 210c are stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the result of the big winning combination lottery is lost.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of the development reach fluctuation pattern at the time of loss according to the production reference example, and FIG. 61 is an example of a variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit according to the production reference example. It is a figure explaining. As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (d) and FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (d), the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern is performed on the main effect display unit 200a in the same manner as the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern. The reach development effect is executed in which the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode, and then a predetermined development image (moving image) is reproduced and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (e) and 61 (e), the mission is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and FIGS. 60 (f), (g) and 61 (g) f) As shown in (g), an image for accomplishing the mission is displayed.

Here, the development image for the reach development production is roughly divided into a loss pattern and a jackpot pattern, and in the development image of the loss pattern, as shown in FIG. 60 (h), the image showing the failure of the mission is finally the image. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination for notifying the loss. On the other hand, in the development image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), an image showing the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, The 210c is stopped and displayed in a combination that notifies the jackpot.

As for the reach development effect, for example, as described above, a mission effect in which the development image of the content to challenge the mission is displayed and a battle effect in which the development image in which the ally character and the enemy character compete with each other are displayed. Has been done. The mission production is provided with a plurality of execution patterns having different mission contents, and the battle production is provided with a plurality of execution patterns having different appearance characters and battle methods. In addition, as described above, the execution pattern of the mission production is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern that accomplishes the mission and a loss pattern that fails the mission. Similarly, in the execution pattern of the battle production, the ally character is the enemy character. It is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern that wins the game and a loss pattern that the ally character loses to the enemy character.

The jackpot pattern and the loss pattern are composed of the same content until the end of the production, and differ in whether the ally character wins or loses in the end, or whether or not the mission is completed. .. Therefore, during the reach development effect, the player cannot identify the result of the big role lottery until the end of the variable effect, and the player is given a sense of expectation of a big hit.

The jackpot pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning combination lottery is a big hit, and the loss pattern is selected only when the result of the big winning combination lottery is a loss. However, in one variable effect, the reach development effect may be executed twice. In this case, the first reach development effect is executed in a loss pattern, and the second reach development effect is a loss pattern. Or it is executed in the jackpot pattern. The flow of the effect when the reach development effect is executed twice in one variable effect will be described below.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable effect when the reach development effect according to the effect reference example is executed twice. For example, it is assumed that after the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode, the mission effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but as shown in FIG. 62 (c) immediately after being notified that the mission could not be achieved. , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the development image for the battle effect is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the second reach development effect is started. The development image for this battle production is such that the ally character and the enemy character play against each other, and at the time of winning the big hit, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), the ally character finally wins the enemy character and at the same time. , As shown in FIG. 62 (f), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination for notifying the jackpot. On the other hand, at the time of loss, as shown in FIG. 62 (g), the ally character is finally defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 62 (h), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c notify the loss. It is displayed as a stop in combination.

FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern according to an effect reference example. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is such that when the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is started, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the effect symbols 210a, The 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of a plurality of types of pseudo modes provided in advance. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same effect symbols 210a and 210b and the effect symbols 210c on which a number "2" larger than these effect symbols 210a and 210b are marked are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner, the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (c). That is, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows the re-variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c. After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), when the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed, the effect symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in the reach mode as shown in FIG. 63 (f). After that, as shown in FIGS. 63 (g) to 63 (i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the development reach fluctuation pattern, and the result of the big role lottery is notified to the player.

As described above, in the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, the content until the effect symbols 210a and 210c are in the reach mode is different from the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern, and after the effect pattern is in the reach mode, it is developed. The fluctuation effect will proceed in the same way as the reach fluctuation pattern.

In the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation display patterns of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c until the reach mode is reached are provided, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped for each variation display pattern. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of times of variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is different. This variation display pattern is determined by the variation mode command, and as the number of temporary stop displays (variation display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c increases, there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot will be finally notified (hereinafter, "reliability"). The selection ratio of the variable mode command at the time of winning a big hit and at the time of losing is set so that the degree) becomes high.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times. If the result of the big winning combination lottery is lost, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times.

Further, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the development reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (variable display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, and the player can display more temporary stop display (variable display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c. While expecting that it will be done, we will watch over the whereabouts of the production.

The execution pattern of the above-mentioned variation effect is determined and controlled by the sub-control board 330 based on the variation pattern command determined by the main control board 300. That is, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variation effect is determined in cooperation with the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a variation effect determination table according to an effect reference example, FIG. 64 (a) shows a first half variation effect determination table, and FIG. 64 (b) shows a second half variation effect determination table. As described above, when the major winning combination lottery is performed on the main control board 300, the variation pattern commands are determined based on the result of the major winning combination lottery, and each determined command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the variation mode command, it acquires an effect random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and also refers to the first half variation effect determination table to obtain the acquired effect random number and the received variation mode command. Based on the above, the execution pattern of the variation effect in the first half is determined. Further, when the variation pattern command is received, an effect random number of 1 is acquired from the range of 0 to 249, and the latter half variation effect determination table is referred to, based on the acquired effect random number and the received variation pattern command. Determine the execution pattern of the fluctuation effect in the latter half. In FIG. 64, only a part of the first half variation effect determination table and the second half variation effect determination table is extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 64, according to the first half variation effect determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variation effect is set for each variation mode number (variation mode command), and the latter half variation effect determination table is used. For example, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the variation effect in the latter half is set for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command). Then, by executing the determined execution patterns of the first half and the second half of the variation effect in combination, one variation effect is executed.

As the execution pattern of the first half, "None" indicating that the variation effect of the first half is not executed is determined as the variation effect of the variation pattern without reach, and "Normal loss 1" corresponding to the variation pattern without reach is determined as the execution pattern of the second half. , "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", "Special loss 2" is executed when it is determined. For example, upon receiving the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the variation effect of the first half is not executed, the sub-control board 330 always determines "none" as the execution pattern of the first half. Further, at this time, as the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time, only one of "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" is determined in the latter half. The selection ratio is set in the variable effect determination table. Therefore, "None" is determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and "Normal loss 1", "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined as the execution patterns in the second half. The execution pattern of the effect is determined by the above-mentioned non-reach variation pattern.

On the other hand, as the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, other than "None" was determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and one of the reach development effects (indicated by developments 1 to 5 in the figure) was determined as the execution pattern in the second half. Will be executed if. In other words, when the variation effect of the reach variation pattern is executed in the main effect display unit 200a, the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 01H is always received and developed. It means that the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number in which any one of 1 to 5 is determined is received.

Here, in FIG. 64 (a), in the "normal reach 1", "normal reach 2", etc. in the execution pattern of the first half, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are the reach modes among the variation effects of the normal reach variation pattern, respectively. More specifically, the background image and the variable display pattern of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c displayed on the main effect display unit 200a until the reach development effect is started are shown. These image patterns are pre-designed to match the time of the variation display of the special symbol associated with the variation mode number. For example, when "normal reach 1" is determined, FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (a). The image shown in (d) will be displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

Further, in FIG. 64A, the “pseudo 2a” or the like in the execution pattern of the first half is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a until the reach development effect is started among the variation effects of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. The display pattern of the main variation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variablely displayed is shown. For example, "pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the number of fluctuation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is two, and the main variation effect image is the display pattern a. Shows. Further, the "pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of the "pseudo 3" in which the number of fluctuation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is three times, and the main variation effect image is the display pattern b. Shows.

In the first half variation effect determination table and the second half variation effect determination table shown in FIG. 64, the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big winning combination lottery is lost. , The selection ratio is set. Further, the development reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern are determined at both the time of loss and the jackpot, but the development reach fluctuation pattern has a higher selection ratio at the time of loss than the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern, and is a jackpot. The hour selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio between the time of loss and the time of big hit, the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern is set with higher reliability than the development reach fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation patterns, the higher the number of pseudos, the higher the selection ratio at the time of big hit, and the lower the selection ratio at the time of loss, and the larger the number of pseudos, the higher the reliability. Has been made.

As described above, the variable effect determination table determines the rough flow of the variable effect, but at the start of the variable effect, various elemental effects that compose the variable effect are based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Executability and execution pattern are further determined. Here, the element effect is, for example, as described above, a variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c in the main effect display unit 200a, or a development image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a in the reach development effect. Further, it refers to all the effects constituting the variable effect such as the effect of moving the effect accessory device 202. In the embodiment, the advance notice effect (suggestion effect) is executed at various timings during the variation effect as the element effect constituting the variation effect.

This advance notice effect is the main effect display unit 200a at the start of the variation effect, at the time of re-variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c in the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and during the reach development effect. It is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the screen or moving the effect accessory device 202 at a predetermined timing, and whether or not the effect can be executed and an execution pattern are determined for each advance notice effect. Multiple types of execution patterns are provided for each advance notice effect, and for each of the multiple types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variation pattern command or variation mode command, in other words, for each jackpot winning or not. The expected value is set for each execution pattern according to the selection ratio.

As described above, when the sub-control board 330 receives the variation pattern command, the execution pattern of the variation effect, whether or not each element effect can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation effect is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done. As described above, the variation effect is performed once for each variation display of the special symbol, but in the embodiment, the effect straddling the variation display of the special symbol a plurality of times is also executed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display effect according to an effect reference example. A hold display area 211 is provided at the lower part of the main effect display unit 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 58 to 63, the hold display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display unit 200a even during the variable effect or the waiting for the game. Then, during the variable effect, the hold display effect is performed in the hold display area 211. In the hold display effect, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read in the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the large winning combination lottery is stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area. The first hold display 212b, the second hold display 212c, the third hold display 212d, and the fourth hold display 212e, which indicate the hold being held, are displayed in the hold display area 211. In the following, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are collectively referred to as a hold display 212.

For example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the main RAM 300c stores four special 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the hold display 212a and the first hold display are displayed. A total of five hold displays 212, from 212b to the fourth hold display 212e, are displayed in the hold display area 211. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is read out to the processing area (0th storage unit), a large winning combination lottery is performed, and the main RAM 300c is performed. When the hold shift process of is executed, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are moved and displayed one to the left. .. Further, when the next special 1 hold is read from this state, each hold display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (c). As described above, the hold display effect is an effect of notifying the player of the special 1 hold number stored in the main RAM 300c.

Further, a plurality of display patterns of the hold display 212 are provided, and the display color is different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, the acquisition time effect determination process (step S536) is executed when the hold is stored, and the fluctuation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out to the 0th storage unit. A look-ahead designation command indicating is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the look-ahead designation command, the display pattern of the hold display corresponding to the newly stored hold is determined based on the receive command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each fluctuation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out by the large winning combination lottery. That is, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to whether or not the jackpot can be won and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the display pattern of the hold display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot. It will be.

FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram for explaining the final hold display pattern determination table, and FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram for explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table. As described above, in the acquisition-time effect determination process on the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 issues a look-ahead designation command indicating the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number determined when the newly stored hold is read. Send to. That is, the look-ahead designation command is a command for transmitting the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined when the hold is read to the sub-control board 330. According to the final hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 is set for each look-ahead designation command (variation pattern number), and when the look-ahead designation command is received, the final hold display 212 is set. The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined.

According to the final hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 (a), "default (white)", "blinking", "blue", "yellow", "green", "black", "red", and "premier" ( One of the eight types of display patterns of "rainbow)" is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the hold display 212 displayed before that is referred to the previous hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 (b). Will be decided. According to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 to be displayed before the movement display is set for each display pattern of the hold display 212.

For example, in the main control board 300, when the hold is stored in the second storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is referred to with reference to the final hold display pattern determination table. Is decided. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined with reference to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the hold display 212a determined earlier. For example, when the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is "blue", according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, "blinking" is 200/250 as the display pattern of the first hold display 212b. Is determined by the probability of, and "blue" is determined by the probability of 50/250.

When the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined in this way, the previous hold display pattern determination table is again set based on the previously determined display pattern of the first hold display 212b. With reference to this, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is determined.

As described above, when the hold is stored, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is first determined, and then the first hold is determined based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a. The display patterns are sequentially determined so as to go back in the reverse direction of the display order, such as the display pattern of the display 212b being determined. According to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the previously determined display pattern of the hold display 212 or has low reliability is determined. Has been done.

As described above, in the hold display effect, the hold display 212 is provided with a plurality of display patterns having different expected values for granting a predetermined game profit. Then, the hold display 212 may be displayed in the display pattern of 1 from the time when it is first displayed on the main effect display unit 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern changes during the display period. In some cases.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes is such that the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter, also referred to as the target hold) is moved to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It is roughly divided into the timing when the target is changed and the target fluctuation effect related to the target hold.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the above-mentioned variation effect will be described. In the following, among the processes on the sub-control board 330, the processes not related to the fluctuation effect will be omitted.

(Sub CPU initialization process of sub control board 330)
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating a sub CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
The sub CPU 330a reads the CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b and performs initialization and setting processing of flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 330c in response to the power being turned on.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeats the process of step S1000-3 until the interrupt process is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

(Subtimer interrupt processing of subcontrol board 330)
FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating the sub-timer interrupt process (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). Then, when the clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330. Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when the value reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received command. In the sub-control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the receive buffer is analyzed by the command receive interrupt process.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the time table and performs a time schedule management process for executing the process corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the time table. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or commands are sent to each production device to perform variable production and major role production. It will control the execution of the production.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a returns the register and ends the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a look-ahead designation command reception process according to an effect reference example executed when a look-ahead designation command is received among the above command analysis processes. As described above, the look-ahead designation command (look-ahead designation variation pattern command) is set in the acquisition-time effect determination process (step S536-11 in FIG. 30) on the main control board 300, and then the subcommand transmission process (FIG. 20). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by step S100-65).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received look-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a stores the preliminary determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1. The sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 includes a first pre-determination information storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second pre-determination corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage area. An information storage unit is provided. The first predetermined information storage unit includes four storage units, a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first predetermined information storage unit correspond to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure reserved storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second predetermined information storage unit includes four storage units, a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second predetermination information storage unit include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. The second special figure corresponds to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the reserved storage area, respectively. Here, of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area or the second special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage unit corresponding to the storage unit in which the reservation is newly stored. Preliminary judgment information is stored in.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs a final hold display pattern determination process for determining the final display pattern of the hold display 212. Here, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined and stored with reference to the final hold display pattern determination table (FIG. 66 (a)) based on the received look-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined based on the storage unit in which the hold is stored, that is, the change timing of the hold display 212 is derived, and the previous hold display pattern determination table is derived by the number of times of the derivation. (FIG. 66 (b)), the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the hold display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process is transferred to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, the sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process for starting the display of the hold display 212, and ends the look-ahead designation command reception process. As a result, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the variation pattern command reception process executed when the variation pattern command is received among the above command analysis processes according to the effect reference example. As described above, the variation pattern command is set in the special symbol variation number determination process (step S612-19 in FIG. 38) on the main control board 300, and then by the subcommand transmission process (step S100-65 in FIG. 20). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis result in step S1220-1, performs the execution pattern of the variation effect in the latter half. Decide and remember.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variable mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis result in step S1220-5, performs the execution pattern of the variation effect in the first half. Decide and remember.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each advance notice effect, and is based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5. , Each notice effect determination table is referred to, and whether or not each advance notice effect is executed and the execution pattern are determined and stored.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes a shift process for shifting the prior determination information stored in the prior determination information storage unit. Here, when starting the variation effect based on the special 1 hold, the pre-determination information stored in the 4th storage unit to the 2nd storage unit of the 1st pre-determination information storage unit is stored in the 1st pre-determination information, respectively. When shifting to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the storage unit and starting the variation effect based on the special 2 hold, the storage unit is stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second predetermined information storage unit. The pre-determined information is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process for moving and displaying the hold display 212. Further, here, when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes, the execution data for changing the display pattern is set at a predetermined timing.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the determination of each of the above steps, and ends the variation pattern command reception process. In addition, based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, a process of displaying an image for variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, an audio output process, a lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, and the like are performed. The effect execution control will be performed.

<Example>
Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following, changes from the above reference example will be described. In the examples described below, unless otherwise specified, the above reference examples are the same, and the same configurations and processes as those of the above reference examples are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the reference examples, and the details thereof are given. The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 71 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment. In the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment, the first starting port 120 arranged at a position where the gaming ball that has entered the first gaming area 116a can enter, and the gaming ball that has entered the second gaming area 116b can enter. It is provided with two second starting ports 122 and the like. The functions of the two second starting ports 122 are the same, and when a game ball enters any of the second starting ports 122, one game ball is similarly paid out as a prize ball and special 2 is reserved. Can be obtained. In the following, in the second gaming area 116b, the second starting port 122 located relatively upward is referred to as the upper second starting port 122, and the second starting port 122 located relatively lower is referred to as the lower second starting port 122. It is called the starting port 122.

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged view of the second gaming area 116b. The lower second starting port 122 is arranged near the lowermost portion of the second gaming area 116b. The second gaming area 116b is provided with various winning openings, which will be described later, but most of the gaming balls that reach the bottom of the second gaming area 116b without entering any of the winning openings. All enter the lower second starting port 122.

Further, the second game area 116b is provided with a normal electric winning opening 123. The upper part of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is open, and a movable piece 123b is provided in this opening. The movable piece 123b can appear and disappear in the front-rear direction of the game board 108, and is usually held in a closed position protruding toward the front side of the game board 108. In the state where the movable piece 123b is held in the closed position, the opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is closed, and it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the ordinary electric winning opening 123.

On the other hand, as in the above-mentioned simultaneous reference example, if a hit is won in a normal game, the movable piece 123b moves to an open position immersed in the back side of the game board 108. When the movable piece 123b moves to the open position, the opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is opened, and the game ball can enter the ordinary electric winning opening 123. The upper second starting port 122 is provided in the ordinary electric winning opening 123, and all the game balls that have entered the ordinary electric winning opening 123 enter the upper second starting opening 122.

The movable piece 123b is tilted so that the left end is slightly above the right end in the front view of the gaming machine 100. When the movable piece 123b is in the closed position, the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b falls on the movable piece 123b. The game ball that has fallen on the movable piece 123b slowly rolls on the movable piece 123b. When the movable piece 123b moves to the open position during this period, the game ball on the movable piece 123b enters the normal electric winning opening 123.

The time during which the game ball rolls on the movable piece 123b is, for example, about 1 to 3 seconds, and if the movable piece 123b does not move to the open position during this period, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 123b From the right side of the movable piece 123b, the second gaming area 116b further flows downward.

A large winning opening 126 is provided between the ordinary electric winning opening 123 and the lower second starting opening 122. The gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment is provided with one large winning opening 126. The opening / closing door 126b is provided to be openable / closable in the large winning opening 126, and when the opening / closing door 126b is closed, it is impossible for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 126. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 126b is open, the game ball can enter the large winning opening 126.

FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating the internal configuration of the large winning opening 126. The second gaming area 116b is provided with a structure 126x projecting from the front side of the gaming board 108. The structure 126x has an opening formed at the upper portion, and this opening serves as a large winning opening 126. An opening / closing door 126b is provided on the upper portion of the structure 126x, and normally, as shown in FIG. 73A, the opening / closing door 126b is maintained in a closed state in which the large winning opening 126 is closed.

The opening / closing door 126b protrudes into the second gaming area 116b so as to face above the gaming machine 100. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 126b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the second gaming area 116b rolls on the opening / closing door 126b. Here, the opening / closing door 126b maintained in the closed state is inclined so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the opening / closing door 126b is in the closed state, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 73A, the game ball that has fallen on the opening / closing door 126b slowly rolls on the opening / closing door 126b from right to left. It will move.

Then, when the big role game is executed, the opening / closing door 126b shifts to the open state in which the big winning opening 126 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 73B, the opening / closing door 126b appears and disappears in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine 100 from a hole formed in the gaming board 108 by an actuator (solenoid) (not shown).

Normally, the actuator is maintained in a non-energized state, the opening / closing door 126b is held at a position protruding toward the front side from the hole of the game board 108, and the large winning opening 126 is closed. Then, when the actuator is energized, as shown in FIG. 73B, the opening / closing door 126b is held at a position immersed in the back side of the hole of the game board 108, and the large winning opening 126 is opened. In this way, in the state where the large winning opening 126 is open, the game ball enters the large winning opening 126.

A lead-out path 126d is provided inside the large winning opening 126. The bottom of the large winning opening 126 is inclined so that the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 126 is guided to the lead-out path 126d. The lead-out path 126d is provided with a probabilistic region 140a and a non-probability region 140d formed of holes through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 126 is provided with the probabilistic region 140a and the non-probability region 140a. It is configured to pass through any of 140d and be discharged to the back side of the game board 108.

The large winning opening 126 is provided with a movable member 140b that opens and closes the probable variable region 140a and the non-probable variable region 140d. The movable member 140b is switched between a state in which the game ball can enter the probability variation region 140a and a state in which the game ball cannot enter the probability variation region 140a by its movement (slide). More specifically, when the movable member 140b is transferred to the position shown in FIG. 73 (c), the non-probability change region 140d is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the probability change region 140a.

On the other hand, when the movable member 140b is transferred to the position shown in FIG. 73 (d), the probabilistic variation region 140a is blocked by the movable member 140b, and the game ball can pass through the non-probability variation region 140d. As will be described in detail later, when a game ball enters the probability variation area 140a during a predetermined round game (hereinafter referred to as a specific round game) of a large role game, the game state after the end of the large role game is a high probability game. When the game ball is set to the state and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the game state after the end of the big role game is set to the low probability game state.

Returning to FIG. 72, a gate 124 is provided above the ordinary electric winning opening 123. Further, in the second gaming area 116b, a first non-electric winning device 127 and a second non-electric winning device 129 are provided. The first non-electric winning device 127 includes a first non-electric winning opening 127a and a movable piece 127b for opening and closing the first non-electric winning opening 127a, and the second non-electric winning device 129 is a second non-electric winning opening. It includes a 129a and a movable piece 129b that opens and closes the second non-electric winning opening 129a.

The movable piece 127b is changed to the open state by the game ball entering the upper second starting port 122, and is changed to the closed state by the two game balls entering the first non-electric winning opening 127a. Similarly, the movable piece 129b is changed to the open state by the game ball entering the upper second starting port 122, and is closed by the two game balls entering the second non-electric winning opening 129a. Transition.

FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a first non-power winning device 127 and a second non-power winning device 129. In FIGS. 74 and 75 and 76 described below, the structure on the back side of the game board 108 as seen from the front side of the game board 108 is shown by a solid line, and the structure on the front side of the game board 108 is shown by a solid line. It is shown by a broken line. Further, FIG. 74 shows a closed state of the first non-power winning device 127 and the second non-power winning device 129. A game ball drop passage 144 is provided on the back surface of the game board 108. All the game balls that have entered the upper second starting port 122 are guided to the game ball drop passage 144. The game ball falling passage 144 extends downward from the upper second starting port 122, and the game ball entering the upper second starting port 122 is on the back side of the game board 108, and the game ball falling passage The 144 falls downward due to its own weight.

The first non-electric winning device 127 includes a collision plate 127c, a gear mechanism 127d, a rocking plate 127e, a locking member 127f, and an urging member 127g, in addition to the above-mentioned first non-electric winning opening 127a and a movable piece 127b. .. The collision plate 127c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and the game ball falling from the upper second starting port 122 collides with the collision plate 127c.

The gear mechanism 127d comprises three gears meshed with each other. Here, the three gears constituting the gear mechanism 127d are referred to as a first gear, a second gear, and a third gear in order from the left side of FIG. 74. A collision plate 127c is attached to the rotation shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 127c rotate integrally.

Further, a rocking plate 127e is provided on the rotation shaft of the third gear. The rotation axis of the third gear penetrates the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108. A movable piece 127b is attached to a portion of the rotation shaft of the third gear that protrudes toward the front surface of the game board 108. Therefore, the third gear, the rocking plate 127e, and the movable piece 127b rotate integrally. The rotation shaft of the third gear is provided on the lower left side of the first non-electric winning opening 127a, and a locking member 127f is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft of the third gear while maintaining a gap.

The locking member 127f is provided so as to be swingable about the right end in the drawing. Further, a urging member 127g composed of, for example, a tension spring is attached to the locking member 127f. The locking member 127f is usually held in the horizontal direction by the urging member 127g, as shown in FIG. 74.

Further, the second non-electric winning device 129 is provided below the first non-electric winning device 127. The second non-electric winning device 129 includes a collision plate 129c, a gear mechanism 129d, a rocking plate 129e, a locking member 129f, and an urging member 129g, in addition to the above-mentioned second non-electric winning opening 129a and a movable piece 129b. .. The collision plate 129c is provided in the game ball drop passage 144, and the game ball falling from the upper second starting port 122 collides with the collision plate 129c.

The gear mechanism 129d comprises three gears meshed with each other. Here, the three gears constituting the gear mechanism 129d are referred to as a first gear, a second gear, and a third gear in order from the left side of FIG. 74. A collision plate 129c is attached to the rotation shaft of the first gear. The first gear and the collision plate 129c rotate integrally.

Further, a rocking plate 129e is provided on the rotation shaft of the third gear. The rotation axis of the third gear penetrates the game board 108 and extends to the front side of the game board 108. A movable piece 129b is attached to a portion of the rotation shaft of the third gear that protrudes toward the front surface of the game board 108. Therefore, the third gear, the rocking plate 129e, and the movable piece 129b rotate integrally. The rotation shaft of the third gear is provided on the lower left side of the second non-electric winning opening 129a, and the locking member 129f is provided on the right side of the rotation shaft of the third gear while maintaining a gap.

The locking member 129f is provided so as to be swingable about the right end in the drawing. Further, a urging member 129g made of, for example, a tension spring is attached to the locking member 129f. The locking member 129f is usually held approximately horizontally by the urging member 129g, as shown in FIG. 74.

FIG. 75 is a first diagram illustrating the operation of the first non-power winning device 127 and the second non-power winning device 129, and FIG. 76 shows the first non-power winning device 127 and the second non-power winning device 129. It is the 2nd figure explaining the operation of. The game ball that has entered the upper second starting port 122 collides with the collision plates 127c and 129c in the process of falling through the game ball fall passage 144. When the game ball collides with the collision plates 127c and 129c, the first gear of the gear mechanisms 127d and 129d is rotated as shown in FIG. 75.

When the first gear rotates, the second gear and the third gear rotate. Due to the rotation of the third gear, the rocking plates 127e and 129e rotate in the counterclockwise direction in the figure about the rotation axis of the third gear. Here, in FIG. 75, the second non-power winning device 129 shows the open state, and the first non-power winning device 127 shows an intermediate stage of the operation from the closed state to the open state. When the collision plates 127c, 129c and the rocking plates 127e and 129e rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the game ball falling in the game ball falling passage 144, the tips of the rocking plates 127e and 129e are locked with the locking members 127f and 129f. Contact.

The rocking plates 127e and 129e rotate further in the counterclockwise direction while pushing up the left end of the locking members 127f and 129f. Then, when the rocking plates 127e and 129e reach a predetermined angle, the contact with the locking members 127f and 129f is released, and the locking members 127f and 129f return to their original positions. In the open state of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129, the movable piece 129b shown in FIG. 75 is opened to the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. It is possible to enter a game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76, in the open state of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129, the game ball flowing down the second gaming area 116b enters the second non-electric winning opening 129a. Suppose you hit a ball. At this time, the game ball that has entered the second non-electric winning opening 129a is guided onto the rocking plate 129e on the back side of the game board 108. When the game ball is placed on the rocking plate 129e, the rocking plate 129e rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game ball, and the rocking plate 129e comes into contact with the locking member 129f from above.

A force for rotating the locking member 129f in the counterclockwise direction acts on the locking member 129f, and at the same time, a force forcing the locking member 129g in the clockwise direction acts on the locking member 129f. At this time, the elastic force of the urging member 129 g is set so as to be roughly balanced with the weight of one game ball. Therefore, in a state where one game ball is mounted on the rocking plate 129e as in the second non-electric winning device 129 of FIG. 76, the rocking plate 129e is locked by the locking member 129f and rotates in the clockwise direction. Is suppressed.

Then, when two or more game balls are placed on the rocking plate 127e as in the first non-electric winning device 127 of FIG. 76, the rocking plate 127e rotates clockwise due to the weight of the game balls. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first non-electric winning opening 127a falls downward, and the first non-electric winning device 127 shifts to the closed state shown in FIG. 74.

As described above, the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 change from the closed state to the open state when one game ball enters the upper second starting port 122. Then, when two game balls each enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a, the state changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, according to the gaming machine 100 of the embodiment, when one gaming ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 123, the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 have a total of four balls. It is possible to enter a game ball.

The above-mentioned configurations of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 are only examples. The structure is particularly limited as long as the first non-electric winning opening 127a or the second non-electric winning opening 129a is opened based on the game ball that has entered the second starting opening 122 or the ordinary electric winning opening 123. Not done. Further, for example, when two or more game balls enter the second starting opening 122 or the ordinary electric winning opening 123, the first non-electric winning opening 127a or the second non-electric winning opening 129a may be opened. ..

Further, in the embodiment, when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a or the second non-electric winning opening 129a, the first non-electric winning device 127 or the second non-electric winning device 129 It was decided to shift to the closed state. However, when one game ball enters or when three or more game balls enter, the first non-electric winning device 127 or the second non-electric winning device 129 may shift to the closed state. ..

Further, only one of the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 may be provided, and the first non-electric winning device 127 and the second non-electric winning device 129 are in total. Three or more may be provided. When a plurality of first non-electric winning devices 127 or second non-electric winning devices 129 are provided, the number of game balls that can be entered in one opening may be different from each other.

FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the embodiment. The main control board 300 has a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first starting port for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting port 120. Detection switch 120s, two second start port detection switches 122s that detect that a game ball has entered the second start port 122, gate detection switch 124s that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, a big winning opening Large winning opening detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered 126s, first non-electric winning opening detection switch 127s that detects that a game ball has entered the first non-electric winning opening 127a, second non-electric winning opening The second non-electric winning opening detection switch 129s for detecting that the game ball has entered the electric winning opening 129a and the probabilistic area detecting switch 140s for detecting that the game ball has entered the probabilistic area 140a are connected to these. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each detection switch.

Although not shown, the second starting port detection switch 122s is provided at the upper second starting port 122 and the lower second starting port 122, respectively.

Further, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 123c that operates a movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123, and a large winning opening solenoid 126c that operates an opening / closing door 126b that opens and closes the first special winning opening 126. , The movable member solenoid 140c that operates the movable member 140b that opens and closes the probability change region 140a is connected, and the main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the normal electric winning opening 123, the large winning opening 126, and the probability changing region 140a. It has become so. The configuration of the other control means is the same as that of the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to an embodiment. The low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, the jackpot determination random number determination table is selected according to the game state at the start of the major winning combination lottery, and the major winning combination lottery is performed by the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number.

In the low-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning combination lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the low probability big hit determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the embodiment, six stages of set values having different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each set value. During the game, the set value is set to one of the six stages, and the random number judgment at the time of low probability corresponding to the currently set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) is determined. A big role lottery is held with reference to the table.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 1 (registered set value = 1), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 78 (a). Is done. According to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, if the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10312, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is another jackpot determination random number, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/210.0.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 2 to 6, a large role is played by referring to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f shown in FIGS. 78 (b) to (f). A lottery will be held. According to the low probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, the jackpot probabilities are about 1 / 204.8 to 186.1, respectively.

FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a high probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to an embodiment. The high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big winning combination lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the high-probability big hit determination random number determination table is referred to.

When the game is in a high-probability game state and the set value is set to 1 (registered set value = 1), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 79 (a). Is done. According to the high-accuracy jackpot-determined random number determination table a, if the jackpot-determined random number is 10001 to 10384, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it is another jackpot-determined random number, it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 170.6.

When the game is in a high-probability game state and the set value is set to 2 to 6, a large role is played by referring to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f shown in FIGS. 79 (b) to 79 (f). A lottery will be held. According to the high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, the jackpot probabilities are about 1 / 167.1 to 154.5, respectively.

As described above, in the embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned simultaneous turning reference example, the small hit is not provided, and only the big hit is provided. However, as in the above-mentioned simultaneous turning reference example, a small hit may be provided in the embodiment. Further, here, the winning probability of the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered set value, but the jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is determined. Only the winning probability of is different depending on the registered setting value. Furthermore, the registration set value is not essential, and the jackpot winning probability in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state may always be constant.

FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a winning symbol random number determination table according to an embodiment. The winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the winning symbol random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the above-mentioned big winning combination lottery, the type of the special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when the "big hit" is won by the special 1 hold, the symbol random number determination table for the special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 80 (a), and the "big hit" is won by the special 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), a symbol random number determination table for special 2 is selected.

According to the special 1 hit symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 80 (a) and the special 2 hit symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 80 (b), the figures are shown according to the acquired values of the winning symbol random numbers. As shown, the jackpot symbol (special symbols A to D) is determined as the special symbol. Specifically, according to the special 1 hit symbol random number determination table, the special symbol A is determined when the hit symbol random number is 0 to 49, and the special symbol is determined when the hit symbol random number is 50 to 74. B is determined, and when the winning symbol random number is 75 to 99, the special symbol C is determined. Therefore, when the jackpot is won based on the special 1 hold, the probability that each jackpot symbol is determined is 50% for the special symbol A and 25% for the special symbols B and C, respectively. On the other hand, according to the hit symbol random number determination table for special 2, the special symbol D is determined regardless of the value of the hit symbol random number.

FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a special electric accessory actuating ram set table according to an embodiment. The special electric accessory actuating ram set table according to the embodiment is used in place of the special electric accessory actuating ram set table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous turning reference example. In addition, the special electric accessory actuated ram set table stores various data for controlling the major role game, and during the major role game, the special electric accessory actuated ram set table is referred to and the big prize opening. The solenoid 126c is energized and controlled. In fact, a plurality of special electric accessory operating ram set tables are provided for each type of special symbol (big hit symbol), and the corresponding table is set at the start of the major role game according to the determined type of special symbol. Although it is set, here, for convenience of explanation, the control data of the special symbol is shown for each symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 81, the big role game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. According to this special electric bonus actuating ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started) and the maximum number of special electric bonus actuations (round game executed during one big role game). (Number of times), the number of times the special electric accessory opening / closing is switched (the number of times the large winning opening 126 is opened in one round), and the solenoid energization time (the energizing time of the large winning opening solenoid 126c for each opening of the large winning opening 126), that is, 1 Opening time of the large winning opening 126 of each round), specified number (maximum number of winnings to the large winning opening 126 in one round game), valid time of closing the large winning opening 126 (closing time of the large winning opening 126 between round games) That is, the interval time) and the ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (variation display of the symbol described later)) are the control data of the special symbol. Each type is stored in advance as shown in the figure.

If the jackpot is won by holding the special 1 and the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, the big role game consisting of four round games is executed. In this big role game, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 4th round games. In the 1st to 3rd round games, the big winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and in the 4th round game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 0.1 seconds. When a specified number of game balls enter while the large winning opening 126 is open, or when the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed, the large winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed. Become.

Further, when the jackpot is won by the special 1 hold and the special symbols B and C are determined as the jackpot symbols, the big role game composed of four round games is executed. In these big role games, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the large winning opening is opened. 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, when the jackpot is won by the special 2 hold and the special symbol D is determined as the jackpot symbol, the big role game composed of 10 round games is executed. In these big role games, the big winning opening 126 is opened only once in the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and if a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the large winning opening is opened. 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating an opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 126 and an opening / closing mode of the probabilistic region 140a by the movable member 140b. In the embodiment, the fourth round game is set to the specific round game, and when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 126 during the fourth round game enters the probability variation area 140a, the game after the big role game. The state becomes a high-probability gaming state. As shown in FIG. 82, in the fourth round game, the movable member 140b opens the probability variation region 140a for a moment (about 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the opening of the large winning opening 126, and then the probability variation over a predetermined time. The region 140a is maintained in a closed state, and then the probabilistic region 140a is maintained in an open state again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82, when the special symbol A is determined, the large winning opening 126 is opened only 0.1 seconds from the start of the fourth round game. During this period, even if the game ball enters the large winning opening 126, it takes a predetermined time for the game ball to reach the probability variation region 140a. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 126 reaches the probability variation region 140a, the probability variation region 140a is always closed, and as a result, when the special symbol A is determined and the big role game is executed. , The game ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a.

If an unexpected situation occurs, such as the game ball getting caught in the big winning opening 126, or the game ball staying in the big winning opening 126 for a long time for some reason. There is a possibility that the game ball may enter the probability variation region 140a even in the large role game in which the special symbol A is determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, in order to facilitate understanding, the words "must" and "certainly" are used to explain, but this is because the state of the gaming machine 100 advances the game. It is premised that it is in an appropriate state and that no unexpected situation has occurred, and does not mean 100% physical.

On the other hand, when the special symbols B, C, and D are determined and the big role game is executed, the big winning opening 126 is opened 29.0 seconds x 1 time from the start of the fourth round game. .. Therefore, there is a possibility that one or two game balls that have entered the large winning opening 126 at the same time as the opening of the large winning opening 126 may not be able to enter the probability variation region 140a, but after that, the large winning opening 126 may not be able to enter. The entered game ball can surely enter the probability variation region 140a.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the major role game according to the embodiment. The game state setting table according to the embodiment is used in place of the game state setting table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. In the embodiment, when the big win game is executed, the game state setting table is set according to the type of the special symbol (big hit symbol), whether or not the game ball has passed (entered) into the probability variation area 140a, and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Refer to, and set the game state after the end of the big role game.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the game ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a in the specific round game, the game state after the big role game is set to the low probability game state regardless of the type of the special symbol. Further, when the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a in the specific round game, the game state after the big role game is set to the high probability game state regardless of the type of the special symbol. When the gaming state after the big role game is set to the high probability gaming state, the high probability number is set to 150 times. That is, when the high-probability gaming state is set, the gaming state is changed to the low-probability gaming state when the large winning combination lottery is executed 150 times.

Further, in the embodiment, apart from the special gaming state (low probability gaming state and high probability gaming state) in which the winning probability of the jackpot related to the special game is defined, the normal game in which the winning probability related to the normal game is defined. The state is set. Here, as the normal game state, a non-time saving game state, an A time saving game state, and a B time saving game state are provided. The normal gaming state will be described later, but in the following, the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state are collectively referred to as a time saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the big role game is executed, the game state after the big role game is set to the time-saving game state regardless of the type of the special symbol and whether or not the game ball has entered the probability variation area 140a. Will be done. Specifically, when the special symbols A, B, and C are determined, the normal game state after the big role game is set to the A time saving game state. At this time, the number of time reductions indicating the number of continuations of the A time reduction game state differs depending on the type of the special symbol, whether or not the game ball has entered the probability variation area 140a, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the like.

Here, as the number of time reductions, a special 2 time reduction number and a total time reduction number are set. The number of special 2 time reductions indicates the number of large role lottery based on the special 2 hold until the time saving game state ends, and the total number of time reductions is the number of large role lottery based on the special 1 holding until the time saving game state ends. And the total number of times of the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold is shown. The numbers shown in the column of the number of time reductions in FIG. 83 indicate the number of special 2 time reductions, and the numbers in parentheses indicate the total number of time reductions.

For example, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state, special 2 The number of time reductions is set to 100, and the total number of time reductions is set to 104. Further, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a low-probability game state and a game state other than the non-time-saving game state. For example, the number of special 2 time reductions is set to 183 times, and the total number of time reductions is set to 187 times.

In addition, when the special symbol A is determined and the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the special 2 time reduction number is set to 150 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, and the total time reduction is performed. The number of times is set to 154 times.

In addition, when the special symbols B and C are determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the special 2 time reduction number is set to 183 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The total number of time reductions is set to 187. On the other hand, when the special symbols B and C are determined and the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the special 2 time reduction number is set to 150 times regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The total number of time reductions is set to 154 times.

Further, when the special symbol D is determined and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the normal game state after the big role game is set to the A time saving game state. At this time, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the special 2 time reduction number is set to 183 times and the total time reduction number is set to 187 times as the time reduction number of times in the A time reduction game state.

On the other hand, when the special symbol D is determined and the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a during the specific round game, the normal game state after the big role game is set to the B time reduction game state. At this time, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the special 2 time reduction number is set to 2 times and the total time reduction number is set to 6 times as the time reduction number in the B time reduction game state.

As described above, as a condition until the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state are completed, the number of large role lottery based on the special 2 hold reaches a predetermined number, and based on the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold. It is set that the total number of big win lottery reaches a predetermined number of times. At this time, the total number of time reductions is set four times more than the number of special 2 time reductions.

In the gaming machine according to the embodiment, the fluctuation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 and the variation display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162 are simultaneously performed in parallel in the same manner as in the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. Can be executed. Therefore, if the special 1 hold is stored in the time-saving game state in which the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold should be executed, the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold will be executed. By setting the total number of time reductions to be larger than the number of special 2 time reductions, the large role lottery based on the special 2 holdings is executed a specified number of times in the special 2 holdings regardless of the number of special 1 holdings when the time saving game state is entered. It becomes possible.

Further, here, as a condition until the B time saving game state ends, it is further included that the variable display of the normal symbol is executed once. Therefore, when the game ball passes through, for example, the gate 124 after being set to the B time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state ends at that point, and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. Here, it is decided that the B time shortening game state is terminated by the start of the variable display of the normal symbol. For example, the variable display of the normal symbol has been completed a predetermined number of times, and the normal game has been won a predetermined number of times. The fact that the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened a predetermined number of times may be set as an end condition of the B time saving game state. In addition, the B time shortening game state at a predetermined timing during the variation display of the normal symbol, a predetermined timing during the start / end of the stop display of the normal symbol, a predetermined timing during the stop display, a predetermined timing during the start / end of the auxiliary game, and a predetermined timing during the auxiliary game. May end.

As described above, whether or not the game ball enters the probability variation region 140a actually depends on the type of the special symbol in which the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 126 in the specific round game is defined. If the game is played properly, when the special symbol A is determined, the game ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a during the specific round game, and the special symbols B, C, and D are determined. In, the game ball can always enter the probability variation region 140a during the specific round game. Therefore, on the premise that the game is properly performed, the game state is set as shown by the thick line in FIG. 83 after the big role game. That is, it can be said that the game states other than those surrounded by the thick line in FIG. 83 are the game states set when irregularity occurs. In the following, the game when the game is properly performed will be described, and the description of the game when irregularity occurs will be omitted.

FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a hit determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The hit-determined random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the hit-determined random number determination table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, a determination process of a normal symbol associated with whether or not to control energization of the movable piece 123b of the normal electric winning opening 123, that is, a general drawing lottery is performed. ..

When the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99, and this random number value is set as the normal figure hold, and the upper limit is four in the normal figure hold storage area of the main RAM 300c. It will be remembered. When the normal drawing lottery is started when the normal gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, the winning determination random number determination table for the non-time saving gaming state is referred to as shown in FIG. 84 (a). According to this non-time saving game state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the non-time saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. When the winning symbol is determined in this general drawing lottery, the movable piece 123b of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the losing symbol is determined, the movable piece 123b of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is closed. It is maintained in a state.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the A time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the hit determination random number determination table for the A time saving game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the A time saving game state, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the A time saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the B time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the winning determination random number determination table for the B time saving game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the B time saving game state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 99, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol. That is, in the B time saving game state, the winning symbol is always determined by the regular drawing lottery.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned winning probability in the general drawing lottery is only an example. For example, even in the B time saving game state, it may be set so that the lost symbol is determined with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 85 (a) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the embodiment, and FIG. 85 (b) is a diagram for explaining the open / close control pattern table according to the embodiment. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table and open / close control pattern table according to the embodiment are used in place of the normal symbol fluctuation time data table and open / close control pattern table according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. According to the normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the gaming state is set to the A time saving gaming state. In the case, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds, and when the gaming state is set to the B time reduction gaming state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1 second. When the fluctuation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) over the determined time. Then, when the winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when the lost symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol display 168 is turned on, the movable piece 123b of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 has an open / close control pattern as shown in FIG. 85 (b). The energization is controlled by referring to the table. In reality, the open / close control pattern table is provided for each gaming state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c according to the gaming state when the normal symbol is determined. ..

According to the opening / closing control pattern table according to the embodiment, the time before the opening of the solenoid (the waiting time until the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is started) and the maximum number of times of switching the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory (the ordinary electric winning opening 123). Number of times of opening), solenoid energization time (energization time of ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c for each opening number of ordinary electric winning opening 123, that is, opening time of one ordinary electric winning opening 123), specified number (ordinary electric winning opening) The maximum number of winnings that can be made to the normal electric winning opening 123 while the 123 is fully open), the normal electric closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123, that is, the pause time), the normal electric valid state time ( The normal electric winning opening 123 (waiting time from the end of the last opening) and the solenoid end wait time (waiting time after the lapse of the solenoid effective state time until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol described later is resumed) are normal. As the control data of the electric winning opening 123, it is stored in advance for each gaming state as shown in the figure.

The opening / closing condition of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 defines three elements: the winning probability of the ordinary symbol, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol, and the opening time of the ordinary electric winning opening 123. That is, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the normal electric winning opening 123, in each of the non-time saving game state, the A time saving game state, and the B time saving game state, It is possible to set the frequency of entering the game ball into the ordinary electric winning opening 123 and the firing prize ball ratio. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and at least in the B time-saving game state, the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 as compared with the non-time-saving game state or the A time-saving game state. You can combine the three elements to make it easier to ball.

FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a gaming state according to an embodiment. As described above, in the embodiment, the special gaming state and the normal gaming state are combined to form one gaming state. Here, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a normal state, and a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and an A-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a low-probability state. The time-saving state is called a game state in which a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are combined, and a gaming state in which a high-probability gaming state and an A-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a probability variation state. A gaming state that combines states is called a specific state.

As described above, only the time of the variation display of the normal symbol is different between the non-time saving game state and the A time saving game state. In the non-time saving game state and the A time saving game state, since the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is 1/100, almost no game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123. Therefore, it can be said that the normal state, the low probability time saving state, and the probability change state are the gaming states in which the normal electric winning opening 123 is almost closed. Further, here, in the case of the probabilistic state, the game proceeds in the same manner depending on whether the normal gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state or the A time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, in the B time saving game state, since the winning probability of the normal drawing lottery is 100/100, the game ball can surely enter the normal electric winning opening 123. However, as described above, the B time saving game state ends when the variation display of the normal symbol is executed once. Strictly speaking, the B time saving game state ends when the variation display of the normal symbol is started once. Therefore, when the specific state is set and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed once, the B time-saving game state immediately changes to the non-time-saving game state, and the game state shifts to the probable change state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, as described above, the normal electric winning opening 123 is almost closed, and almost no game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123.

The opening / closing control pattern of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is determined based on the ordinary gaming state when the ordinary drawing lottery is executed. Therefore, when the normal electric winning opening 123 is executed in the B time saving game state and the normal electric winning opening 123 is won, the normal electric winning opening 123 has 0. The 16-second release will be repeated 10 times (see FIG. 85).

Therefore, when the specific state is set after the big role game, the auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened 10 times is executed only once, but the game state during this auxiliary game is in a probable change state. ing.

Further, in the first special symbol display 160, the fluctuation time of the symbol based on the special 1 hold is displayed, and in the second special symbol display 162, the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the special 2 hold is made. The time is set as shown in FIG. 86 (b) according to the gaming state. For example, in the normal state, the fluctuation time determined based on the special 1 hold is set to 3 to 100 seconds, and the fluctuation time determined based on the special 2 hold is set to 10 minutes. Therefore, in the normal state, the large role lottery based on the special 1 hold and the variable display of the symbol (hereinafter referred to as special 1 change) are subject to substantial fluctuations, and the large role lottery based on the special 2 hold and the variable display of the symbol (hereinafter referred to as special 2) are subject to substantial fluctuation. (Called fluctuation) is treated as irregular. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to make a so-called left-handed strike in order to allow the game ball to enter the first starting port 120, and to let the game ball flow down to the first game area 116a.

Further, in the low probability time reduction state, the probability change state, and the specific state, the fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation is shorter than that in the normal state. Since the special 2 fluctuation is more advantageous than the special 1 fluctuation, the special 2 fluctuation is subject to a substantial fluctuation in the low probability time saving state, the probability variation state, and the specific state, and the special 1 fluctuation is treated as irregular. In this way, due to the fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation and the special 2 fluctuation, as shown by the thick line in FIG. 2 Fluctuations are subject to substantial fluctuations.

In addition, when it is set to a specific state (high probability game state and B time shortening game state) after the big role game, it is set to the special fluctuation period. This special variation period is a period in which the variation pattern random number determination table to be selected is defined for each number of special 2 variations after the big role game. As described above, when the normal drawing lottery is executed in a specific state (high probability gaming state and B time saving game state), the B time saving game state ends and becomes a non-time saving gaming state, so that it is a probabilistic state (high probability game). It shifts to the state and the non-time saving game state). Therefore, when the special fluctuation period is set to the specific state after the big role game, the special fluctuation period is set over the probable change state from the specific state.

The first fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation in the special fluctuation period is always determined to be 10 seconds. In addition, the second fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation in the special fluctuation period is always determined to be 70 seconds if the result of the big role lottery is lost, and 10 seconds if the result of the big role lottery is a big hit. To. Further, in the third and subsequent special 2 fluctuations in the special fluctuation period, the same fluctuation pattern random number determination tables K and L as in the high-probability gaming state and the A time-saving gaming state are selected. According to this table, if the result of the big win lottery is lost, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 to 30 seconds, and if the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation time is determined to be 30 to 50 seconds.

Next, the playability of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram illustrating a transition of a gaming state according to the original game playability according to the embodiment. Here, a case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the normal state. In the normal state, since the actual fluctuation target is set to the special 1 fluctuation, the player first launches the game ball toward the first game region 116a. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the winning probability of the jackpot in the normal state is about 1/210, and the player continues to hit left until the jackpot is won.

If the jackpot is won based on the special 1 hold in the normal state, the special symbol A is determined with a probability of 50%, and the special symbols B and C are determined with a probability of 25%, respectively. When the special symbol A is determined, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a large role game composed of four round games is executed. However, when the special symbol A is decided, the large winning opening 126 is opened only for 0.1 seconds in the fourth round game, so that the number of prize balls that the player can actually obtain is three times. It will be for round games. Hereinafter, the large role game in which the special symbol A is determined and executed is referred to as a 4R normal large role game.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening 126, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball. Since the specified number of balls in one round game is 10, when the specified number of game balls enter the large winning opening 126, 150 prize balls are paid out in one round game. In the 4R normal big role game, 450 prize balls can be obtained in 3 round games.

Further, in the 4R normal large role game, the game ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), the game state after the end of the 4R normal large-role game is a low probability time saving state. In the low probability time saving state, since the target of the substantial fluctuation is the special 2 fluctuation, the player makes a so-called right-handed strike and launches the game ball toward the second gaming region 116b. If the jackpot is won in the normal state and the special symbol A is determined and set to the low probability time saving state, the special 2 time saving number is set to 100 times.

In the low-probability time-saving state, if the jackpot is not won within the range of the special 2 time-saving number of times, a so-called time-saving omission occurs and the gaming state shifts to the normal state. In this case, the player hits the left again and aims to win the big hit by the special 1 fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the jackpot is won based on the special 1 hold and the special symbols B and C are determined, the game is composed of four round games as shown in FIG. 87 (d). A big role game is executed. Hereinafter, the large role game in which the special symbols B and C are determined and executed is referred to as a 4R probable variable large role game. In the 4R probable change big role game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 1st to 4th round games. Therefore, in the 4R probable big role game, 600 prize balls can be obtained in four round games.

Further, in the 4R probability variation large role game, if the game is properly performed, the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a in the specific round game. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the 4R probabilistic large role game is the probabilistic state as shown in FIG. 87 (e). In the probabilistic state, since the actual fluctuation target is the special 2 fluctuation, the player strikes right and launches the game ball toward the second game area 116b. When the special symbols B and C are determined and set to the probabilistic state, the high probability number and the special 2 time reduction number are both set to 150 times.

In the probable change state, if the jackpot is not won within the range of the special 2 time reduction number of times, the so-called time reduction omission occurs and the gaming state shifts to the normal state. In this case, the player hits the left again and aims to win the big hit by the special 1 fluctuation.

Further, in the low probability time saving state or the probability change state, if the jackpot is won due to the special 2 fluctuation, the special symbol D is always determined as the jackpot symbol. When the special symbol D is determined, as shown in FIG. 87 (f), a large role game composed of 10 round games is executed. Hereinafter, the large role game in which the special symbol D is determined and executed is referred to as a 10R probable variable large role game. In the 10R probable change big role game, the big winning opening 126 is opened for 29.0 seconds in the 1st to 10th round games. Therefore, in the 10R probable big role game, 1500 prize balls can be obtained in 10 round games.

Further, in the 10R probability variation large role game, if the game is properly performed, the game ball enters the probability variation area 140a in the specific round game. Therefore, the game state after the end of the 10R probabilistic large role game is a specific state as shown in FIG. 87 (h). In the specific state, since the actual fluctuation target is the special 2 fluctuation, the player strikes right and launches the game ball toward the second game area 116b.

Here, when the special symbol D is determined and set to the specific state, the high probability number is set to 150 times, and the special 2 time reduction number is set to 2 times. As described above, in the specific state, the normal gaming state is the B time saving gaming state, and as the end condition of the B time saving gaming state, the total number of special 1 variation and special 2 variation reaches 6 times, and the special 2 variation It is set that the number of times reaches 2 times and that the variable display of the normal symbol is executed once.

Since the large winning opening 126 is provided in the second game area 116b, the game ball flows down the second game area 116b even during the 10R probability variation large role game. The gate 124 is arranged on the most upstream side of the second game area 116b, and since the game ball frequently passes through the gate 124, the normal symbol hold is stored even during the 10R probability change large role game, and the normal symbol changes. The display is running. After the 10R probabilistic large role game is completed and set to a specific state, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started for the first time, the specific state (B time saving game state) ends at that point, and (i) in FIG. As shown in, it shifts to the probabilistic state. If the game is played properly, it shifts from the specific state to the probable change state during the first special 2 change after the 10R probable change big role game.

As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation large role game is 10 seconds. As shown in FIG. 87 (g), when the general drawing lottery is executed and the winning is won within 10 seconds from the end of the 10R probabilistic large role game to the end of the first special 2 fluctuation. A non-electric bonus period is granted. That is, the non-electric bonus period is given based on the execution of the general drawing lottery during the first special 2 change after the end of the 10R probability variation large role game. This non-electric bonus period is the execution period of one auxiliary game in which the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is opened 10 times.

When the general drawing lottery is executed in a specific state and the winner is won, the auxiliary game is executed. The auxiliary game executed by winning the general drawing lottery in a specific state consists of 10 sets of open games. In one set of open games, the normally electric winning opening 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds and then kept closed for 5.0 seconds. Therefore, one set of open games takes about 5.16 seconds, and an auxiliary game consisting of 10 sets of open games takes 51.6 seconds or more. Further, when the auxiliary game is executed, the opening time is set to 2.0 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.5 seconds, so that the time required for the entire auxiliary game is 54.1 seconds. Therefore, the fluctuation time (70 seconds) of the second special 2 fluctuation after the big role game is longer than the time from the opening start to the end of the normal electric winning opening 123 and the time of the entire auxiliary game.

If the player is properly right-handed, the game ball is launched into the second game area 116b at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Almost all of the game balls launched toward the second game area 116b fall on the movable piece 123b. As described above, the game ball that has fallen on the movable piece 123b rolls on the movable piece 123b for about 1 to 3 seconds. Therefore, if the game balls are dropped on the movable piece 123b at intervals of 0.6 seconds, when the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds, one or two game balls are surely normally electric. Enter the winning opening 123.

All the game balls that have entered the normal electric winning opening 123 enter the upper second starting opening 122. When the game ball enters the upper second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is acquired, and the game ball entering the second starting port 122 drops the game ball provided on the back side of the game board 108. In the process of falling down the passage 144, the first non-power winning device 127 and the second non-power winning device 129 are changed to the open state.

The normal electric winning opening 123 is opened for 0.16 seconds and then kept closed for 5.0 seconds. Therefore, if right-handed striking is continued during this period, the game ball that has fallen on the closed movable piece 123b will flow further downward. The movable piece 127b of the first non-electric prize device 127 and the movable piece 129b of the second non-electric prize device 129 are located on the rolling path of the game ball that has flowed down below the movable piece 123b. When the movable pieces 127b and 129b are in the open state, almost all of the game balls that have flowed down below the movable piece 123b enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. (See FIG. 72).

As described above, the first non-electric winning device 127 is closed when two game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a, and the second non-electric winning device 129 has two games. When the ball enters the second non-electric winning opening 129a, it is closed.

That is, in one set of open games, when a game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123, a total of four game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. The ball becomes possible. In the first non-electric prize opening 127a and the second non-electric prize opening 129a, for example, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls for each game ball. In this case, the player can win 40 prize balls in one set of open games. In the auxiliary game, 10 sets of open games are performed, so that the player can obtain an additional 400 prize balls in the non-electric bonus period immediately after the 10R probable big role game.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entry of game balls into the first non-electric prize opening 127a and the second non-electric prize opening 129a is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 15. In this case, the player can acquire 600 game balls during the non-electric bonus period, and can acquire 2000 or more game balls in combination with the 10R probability variation large role game.

As described above, the non-electric bonus period requires a time of 50 seconds or more, but is set to a special variation period after the end of the 10R probability variation large role game. By providing a special fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation will be 10 seconds if it is lost, and the fluctuation time of the second special 2 fluctuation will be 70 seconds after the end of the 10R probability variation large role game. Become. Therefore, if the result of the big role lottery based on the 1st and 2nd special 2 hold is lost after the end of the 10R probability change big role game, the non-electric bonus period is surely during the 2nd special 2 change. It ends in.

Then, if the results of the large role lottery based on the first and second special 2 hold are both lost, the game is played from the third special 2 change in the same manner as the probability change state shown in FIG. 87 (e). proceed. Further, if a big hit is won by a big win lottery based on the first or second special 2 hold after the end of the 10R probable big role game, the 10R probable big role game is executed again. Details will be described later, but if a big hit is won by the big role lottery based on the first special 2 hold after the end of the 10R probable big role game, the second 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period overlap. .. That is, even in this case, the player can acquire the prize ball by the non-electric bonus period during the second 10R probability variation large role game. In addition, a non-electric bonus period is granted even after the end of the second 10R probable change large role game.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart of the 10R probability variation large role game and the non-electric bonus period according to the embodiment. The timing chart shown in FIG. 88 shows the case where the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation large role game is lost. When the 10R probabilistic large role game is executed, an opening period (indicated as “OP” in the figure) is set as shown in FIG. 88 (a), and then the large winning opening 126 is opened during the round game. .. Then, when the tenth round game (indicated as "final R" in the figure) is completed, the ending period (indicated as "ED" in the figure) is set.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 during the 10R probability variation large role game, and the first special 2 fluctuation is 10 seconds after the end of the ending period. It is performed, and the second special 2 fluctuation is performed for 70 seconds with a fixed time (0.5 seconds) in between.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (e), the gaming state is set to the B time shortening gaming state at the end of the ending period. Then, during the first special 2 change, when the change display of the normal symbol is started as shown in FIG. 88 (c) during the B time saving game state, the B time saving game state ends and the normal The gaming state shifts to the non-time saving gaming state. This variation display of the normal symbol is performed for 1 second, and when the winning symbol is displayed, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), an open game consisting of opening and closing of the normal electric winning opening 123 is repeated for 10 sets. Further, during each open game, the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a are opened based on the entry of the game ball into the ordinary electric winning opening 123, and the two game balls are each opened. Upon entering the ball, the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a are closed.

Here, the gaming machine 100 outputs an external signal to a hall computer provided in the gaming field. In the game hall, an external display device is installed for each gaming machine 100, and based on the external signal output from the gaming machine 100, the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, and whether or not the big hit is being hit are in a row of villas. Whether or not it is displayed on the external display device. The external signal includes a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot is in progress. This jackpot signal is usually output during a major game.

Although not shown, the prize ball signal is output as an external signal in the game machine 100 every time 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In the external display device, for example, by counting the number of times the prize ball signal is output during the output of the big hit signal, the total number of prize balls paid out during one big game is notified.

Here, the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment is given a non-electric bonus period immediately after the end of the 10R probability variation large role game. As described above, the player can obtain, for example, 1500 prize balls in the 10R probability variation large role game, and can obtain 400 prize balls in the non-electric bonus period. If you consider the 10R probabilistic big role game and the non-electric bonus period as one big hit, you will get 1900 game balls, which is more than that, where you can only get 1500 game balls in one big role game. It can be notified that it has been done.

In this case, for example, the output conditions of the jackpot signal are set in advance as follows. That is, from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol during the big role game (start of the opening to the end of the ending), in the specific state (during the B time reduction game state), and in the specific state (B time reduction game state), the normal electric winning opening 123 The time until a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after closing is set as the output condition of the jackpot signal. This predetermined time includes the time until a total of four game balls enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a in one big hit in the tenth set of open games. Set for. Therefore, it is desirable that the predetermined time is set to the time required for a total of four game balls to enter the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. For example, when the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, it takes at least 0.6 seconds x 4 = 2.4 seconds before the four game balls are fired, so 2.4 seconds. The time should be at least seconds. When the jackpot signal output condition is set in this way, the jackpot signal is output as shown in FIG. 88 (h). In this case, the jackpot signal is output from the start of the 10R probable big role game to the end of the non-electric bonus period.

Also, for example, the non-electric bonus can be made to look like a big hit different from the big role game. For example, from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol during the big role game (start of the opening to the end of the ending) and in the specific state (B time reduction game state), after the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). ) Elapses as the output condition of the jackpot signal. That is, unlike the example shown in FIG. 88 (h), the output condition of the jackpot signal is not set during the specific state (during the B time saving game state).

When the jackpot signal output condition is set in this way, the jackpot signal is output as in the modified example shown in FIG. 88 (i). In this case, the output of the jackpot signal is interrupted between the 10R probability variation big role game and the non-electric bonus period. Therefore, in the external display device, the jackpot signal is counted as being output twice, and the number of jackpots is counted more than in the example shown in FIG. 88 (h).

The processing in the main control board 300 for realizing the above-mentioned playability will be described below. Here, among the processes of the main control board 300, a process different from the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example will be described. Therefore, among the processes described in the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example, the processes not described below are similarly executed in the examples.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89, in the timer interrupt process according to the embodiment, the payout control management process S800 is executed instead of the payout control management process S400-25 of the simultaneous rotation reference example. The payout control management process S800 will be described later.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The switch management process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the switch management process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. The switch management process according to the embodiment is the same as the switch management process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example, and the processes from S500-1 to S540 are different, and the processes after S500-13 are different. Therefore, here, the processing after S500-13 will be described.

(S500-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether it is the time when the probability change area detection switch is turned on, that is, whether the game ball has entered the probability change area 140a and the detection signal is input from the probability change area detection switch 140s. As a result, if it is determined that the probabilistic region detection switch is on, the process is transferred to step S550, and if it is determined that the probabilistic region detection switch is not on, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S550)
The main CPU 300a executes a probability-changing area passing process for determining whether or not the game ball has properly entered the probability-changing area 140a.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a probability variation region passing process (step S550) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S550-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the probabilistic region valid period flag indicating that it is a period in which the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic region 140a is regarded as valid is turned on. Although detailed description is omitted, the probability variation area validity period flag is turned on at the start of the fourth round game and turned off when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the end of the fourth round game. .. If it is determined that the probabilistic region valid period flag is turned on, the process is transferred to step S550-3, and if it is determined that the probabilistic region valid period flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S550-5.

(Step S550-3)
The main CPU 300a turns on the probabilistic region passing flag and ends the probabilistic region passing processing.

(Step S550-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process and ends the probabilistic area passing process.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol variation number determination process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol variation number determination process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol determination data (type of special symbol) saved in step S610.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the currently set gaming state, and determines whether the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state, the process is transferred to step S612-5, and if it is determined that the normal gaming state is not the reduced working hours gaming state, the processing is transferred to step S612-21.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not it is the start of the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162. As a result, if it is determined that it is the start of the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162, the process is transferred to step S612-7, and the variable display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162 is started. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process is moved to step S612-13.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the special 2 time reduction counter that counts the special 2 time reduction count.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special 2 time reduction number cut counter updated in step S612-7 is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process is transferred to step S612-11, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process is transferred to step S612-13.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets to 0) the total time reduction counter that counts the total time reduction.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the total time reduction counter that counts the total time reduction.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the total time reduction count cut counter updated in step S612-13 is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process is transferred to step S612-17, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process is transferred to step S612-21.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets to 0) the special 2 time reduction counter.

(Step S612-19)
The main CPU 300a turns on a zero flag indicating that the counter value of the special 2 time reduction count cut counter or the total time reduction count cut counter has been changed from 1 to 0.

(Step S612-21)
The main CPU 300a executes a variation pattern random number determination table selection process that selects and sets a corresponding variation pattern random number determination table based on the current game state, hold type, determined special symbol type, and the like.

(Step S612-23)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table set in step S612-21 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9 or step S610-55. do.

(Step S612-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-23 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating the number-of-times cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The number-cutting management process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the number-cutting management process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous turning reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the zero flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the zero flag is turned on, the process is transferred to step S613-3, and if it is determined that the zero flag is not turned on, the cut-off management process is terminated.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. Although detailed description is omitted, here, as the time saving state flag indicating the normal gaming state, the flag for the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, and the B time saving gaming state are provided. During the game, one of the time saving state flags is on, but here, the main CPU 300a turns off the flag for the A time saving game state or the B time saving gaming state, and turns on the flag for the non-time saving gaming state. do.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a turns off the zero flag and ends the number-of-times cut management process.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process (step S630) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the processing target identification value.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol related to the hold type corresponding to the processing target identification value set in the main RAM 300c is being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. .. As a result, if it is determined that the stop display is in progress, the process is transferred to step S630-5, and if it is determined that the stop display is not in progress, the process is transferred to step S630-37.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-23 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is transferred to step S630-37, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S630 is performed. Move the process to -7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big winning combination lottery.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that there is a loss, the process is transferred to step S630-29, and if it is determined that there is no loss, the process is transferred to step S630-11.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there is a special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if it is determined that there is a special symbol in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S631, and if it is determined that there is no special symbol in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S630-13.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes the symbol forced stop process.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming state to the initial state.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessory operation ram set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-15, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter. .. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the large role game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory, and by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory at the start of each round game, the current number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated. The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big role game, the process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-15, and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the major game to the sub-control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H".

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal board 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this processing, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big role game (opening).

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for confirming the game state when the special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is confirmed.

(Step S630-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the processing target identification value stored in the main RAM 300c is the maximum (01H). As a result, if it is determined that the processing target identification value is the maximum, the special symbol stop symbol display processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the processing target identification value is not the maximum, the processing is moved to step S630-39. ..

(Step S630-39)
The main CPU 300a adds 01H to the processing target identification value, and shifts the processing to step S630-3.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the large winning opening end wait process (S670) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The large winning opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the large winning opening end waiting process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the large winning opening end wait process is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the timer value is determined to be "0". The process is transferred to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set in the spare area (spare counter) in step S610-29 or step S610-75.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the probabilistic region passing flag.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a special gaming state based on the probabilistic region passing flag loaded in step S670-5. Here, if the probability variation area passage flag is an on flag, it is set to a high probability gaming state, and if the probability variation area passage flag is an off flag, it is set to a low probability gaming state.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S670-7 whether the high probability gaming state is set. As a result, if it is determined that the high-probability gaming state is set, the process is transferred to step S670-11, and if it is determined that the high-probability gaming state is not set, the process is transferred to step S670-13.

(Step S670-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the high-accuracy number-cutting counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal gaming state based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the total time reduction count cut counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the special 2 time reduction number cut counter based on the data loaded in step S670-3.

(Step S670-19)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S670-13 whether or not the B time saving game state is set. As a result, if it is determined that the B time reduction game state is set, the process is transferred to step S670-21, and if it is determined that the B time reduction game state is not set, the process is transferred to step S670-23.

(Step S670-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a counter for reducing the number of times in the normal drawing. It should be noted that the normal figure time reduction number cut counter counts the number of times of variation display of the normal symbol until the end of the B time reduction game state. Here, "1" is set in the time reduction counter.

(Step S670-23)
The main CPU 300a executes a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the output of the jackpot signal. As a result, if the B time reduction game state is not set after the big game, the output of the big hit signal is stopped at the end of the big game.

(Step S670-25)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting a game state set after the end of the major game.

(Step S670-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the number-of-times commands corresponding to the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the variable display of the symbol is restarted.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol change waiting process (S710) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol change waiting process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal symbol change waiting process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter, and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol hold is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the normal figure hold (hit-determined random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal figure hold storage area to the storage unit having one smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the normal figure hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the normal drawing hold stored in the 1st storage unit is transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this normal symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball counter is subtracted by "1", and a normal symbol hold reduction designation command indicating that the normal symbol hold is subtracted by "1" is transmitted. Set in the buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the hit determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, performs a general drawing lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. The normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a hit, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally turned on. For example, if a winner is won, the normal symbol stop symbol number is "0". Is determined, and in the case of loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current gaming state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol fluctuation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S710-3 and the normal symbol fluctuation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display 168 in order to start variable display of the normal symbol. When, for example, "0" is set as the counter value in the normal symbol display symbol counter, the normal symbol display 168 is lit and controlled, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol display is displayed. The device 168 is turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating a hold of a normal figure, which indicates the number of hold of the normal figure stored in the hold storage area of the normal figure.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a transmits a normal symbol designation command based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (win symbol or lost symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Set to.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process is transferred to step S710-23.

(Step S710-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter.

(Step S710-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal time reduction number cut counter updated in step S710-23 is 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process is transferred to step S710-27.

(Step S710-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. Here, the flag for the B time-saving gaming state is turned off, and the flag for the non-time-saving gaming state is turned on.

(Step S710-29)
The main CPU 300a turns on the signal off standby flag.

(Step S710-31)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process (S741) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S741-1)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number (the number of times of opening / closing of the movable piece 123b of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 during one opening / closing control). Is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the processing for switching the opening / closing of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory is terminated, and if it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the processing is performed in step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the open / close control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c. Stop control data) and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal power closing effective time = pause time) of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c are extracted.

(Step S741-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, or stops energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c. Object Solenoid Energization control processing is executed. By executing this ordinary electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c is controlled in steps S400-23 and S400-25.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the normal electric winning opening 123 once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the energization start state of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c is performed, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c is performed in step S741-5. As a result, if it is determined that the energization start state is determined, the process is transferred to step S741-11, and if it is determined that the energization start state is not obtained, the process is transferred to step S741-15.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S741-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal electric opening designation command indicating the start of opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 in the transmission buffer, and ends the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process.

(Step S741-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c is stopped, that is, whether the control process for stopping the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123c is performed in step S741-5. As a result, if it is determined that the power supply is stopped, the process is transferred to step S741-17, and if it is determined that the power supply is not stopped, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S741-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal electric closing designation command indicating the end of opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 in the transmission buffer, and ends the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process (S770) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The ordinary electric accessory winning opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the ordinary electric accessory winning opening end wait process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In that case, the process is transferred to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the signal off standby flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the signal off standby flag is on, the process is transferred to step S770-5, and if it is determined that the signal off standby flag is not turned on, the process is performed in step S770-9. Move.

(Step S770-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds in the signal off timer. The timer value of this signal off timer is subtracted in the timer update process of S400-15. Then, when the timer value is subtracted from 1 to 0, the jackpot signal is turned off in the external information management process of S400-27. As a result, when the winning symbol is determined by the normal drawing lottery executed in the B time saving game state and the auxiliary game in which the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened is executed, the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is completed for the 10th time. When 5 seconds have passed since then, the jackpot signal will be turned off.

(Step S770-7)
The main CPU 300a turns off the signal off standby flag.

(Step S770-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol is restarted.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating a payout control management process (S800) in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not a payout completion command indicating the completion of payout has been received from the payout control board 310. The payout completion command is configured so that the number of paid out game balls can be identified. If it is determined that the payout completion command has been received, the process is transferred to step S800-3, and if it is determined that the payout completion command has not been received, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the payout counter. The payout counter counts 10 game balls, and the counter value is updated from 0 to 9, and when the counter value is 9, it is updated from 9 to 0. Here, the counter value is updated by the number of game balls indicated by the received payout completion command.

(Step S800-5)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S800-3 whether the counter value of the payout counter has been updated from 9 to 0. As a result, if it is determined that the update has been made from 9 to 0, the process is transferred to step S800-7, and if it is determined that the update has not been made from 9 to 0, the payout control management process is terminated.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a outputs a winning signal, which is an external signal, and ends the payout control management process. For example, when the payout counter is 9 and a payout completion command indicating 15 payout completions is received, the counter value of the payout counter is updated twice from 9 to 0 in one process. .. In this way, when the counter value is updated twice from 9 to 0, the winning signal is output twice. As a result, a winning signal is output every time 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Next, the production related to the 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period will be described. In the embodiment, the production is performed so that the 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period are shown as one big hit. However, the non-electric bonus period is not granted unless the change display of the normal symbol is executed during the first special 2 change after the 10R probability change big role game. That is, if the second special 2 change is started before the change display of the normal symbol is executed after the 10R probability change large role game, the normal game state is the non-time saving game at the start of the second special 2 change. It will be set to the state.

Therefore, even if the change display of the normal symbol is started after the start of the second special 2 change, the normal figure lottery is executed in the non-time saving game state. In this case, even if the winning symbol is won in the regular drawing lottery, the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened only 0.1 seconds × 1 time, and the player cannot obtain the non-electric bonus. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first and second special 2 fluctuations after the 10R probability variation large role game is determined to be 10 seconds and 70 seconds, respectively, regardless of whether or not the non-electric bonus period is set. Even if the non-electric bonus period is not set, if the same effect as when the non-electric bonus period is set is executed, the player will be uncomfortable for a long time. There is a risk.

Further, as described above, if a big hit is won in the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probable big role game, the second 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period overlap. In this case, it is desirable to perform an effect that enhances the satisfaction. In the embodiment, the interest of the game is improved by making the production different depending on the result of the special 2 change after the 10R probable big role game and whether or not the non-electric bonus period is set.

Here, a plurality of production systems are provided that are selectively executed according to the result of the special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation large role game and whether or not the non-electric bonus period is set. Hereinafter, six patterns of production systems from the first production system to the sixth production system will be described. Further, each effect system described below is premised on the fact that the game ball has entered the probability change area 140a during the specific round game of the 10R probability change large role game.

FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a first effect system. After the end of the 10R probabilistic large role game, the first special 2 change becomes a loss, and if the change display of the normal symbol is started during this special 2 change, the first special 2 change to the second special 2 change are straddled. A non-electric bonus period will be granted. If the 1st and 2nd special 2 fluctuations are both lost and the non-electric bonus period is given after the 10R probable change big role game, the production system becomes the first production system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variation large role game, and after the ending period elapses, 2 special 2 fluctuations are executed. In each of these two special 2 fluctuations, the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. Further, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbol is started, and after the winning symbol is displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games is executed after the opening period. This auxiliary game ends during the special 2 fluctuation regardless of the start timing of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol. In FIG. 100, cross-hatching indicates that the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is open, and “Int.” In the figure indicates an interval during which the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is maintained in the closed state.

In the first production system, the round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variation large role game. Then, with the start of the tenth round game, a direction instruction effect for prompting a firing operation for causing the game ball to flow down to the second game area 116b is executed. Then, with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the generation effect of notifying the occurrence of the non-electric bonus is executed.

After that, the winning effect is executed from the start of the first set of open games to the end of the tenth set of open games, and the ending is performed from the end of the tenth set of open games to the end of the second special 2 change. The effect (indicated as "ED effect" in the figure) is executed. In addition, from the start of the first round game in the 10R probable big role game to the end of the 10th set open game, in parallel with each of the above effects, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are performed. Will be executed.

FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the first effect system. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), during the 1st to 9th round games, a round effect in which a predetermined image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a is executed. In addition, during this period, a round number notation effect for displaying the current number of round games is executed at the lower left of the main effect display unit 200a, and a total acquisition number notification effect for displaying the total number of game balls acquired by the player is executed. To.

Then, when the 10th round game is started, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the message "Aim at the right gate" and the arrow in the right direction are displayed on the main effect display unit 200a. Direction instruction production is started. This direction instruction effect is executed from the start of the tenth round game to the first special 2 change. When the special 2 variation is started during the direction instruction effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the variation display of the mini symbol is started in the upper right portion of the main effect display unit 200a. Here, nine types of mini-designs on which any number from 1 to 9 is written are scrolled and displayed. In each of the following figures, the scroll display of the mini symbol is indicated by a white arrow.

When the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the direction instruction effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (d), the generation effect of displaying "non-electric BONUS GET" is executed on the main effect display unit 200a. During this generation effect, when the first special 2 variation is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 101 (e). .. Here, if the result of the big role lottery is a big hit, the mini symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the big role lottery is lost, the mini symbols other than "7" are stopped and displayed. Here, since the first special 2 fluctuation is a loss, the mini symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed.

Further, here, even during the generation effect, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are continuously executed. However, during the generation effect, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect may be interrupted.

Then, when the first set of open games is started after the symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the winning effect is started. In this winning effect, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and a predetermined value is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. Audio is output. Further, even during this winning effect, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are continuously executed.

However, the mode of the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect changes between the 10R probability variation large role game and the non-electric bonus period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (f), in the round number notation effect during the non-electric bonus period, "EXTRA" is displayed above the number indicating the number of round games. In addition, in the round number notation effect during the non-electric bonus period, the number of open games in the auxiliary game is added to the number of round games of the 10R probability variation large role game. Therefore, during the first set of open games, the number of round games is displayed as "11R" as shown in FIG. 101 (f), and during the tenth set of open games, as shown in FIG. 101 (g). , The number of round games is displayed as "20R".

As shown in FIG. 100A, the display of the number of round games in the round number notation effect is updated based on the entry of the game ball into the normal electric winning opening 123 and the upper second starting opening 122. .. Therefore, in one set of open games, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 and the upper second starting opening 122, the number of round games is not updated.

In this way, in the round number notation production, the predetermined display that can identify the number of times is updated based on the opening of the large winning opening 126 during the 10R probability change big role game, and the normal electric winning opening 123 is updated during the non-electric bonus period. Based on the opening of, the predetermined display can be updated, and in the non-electric bonus period, the predetermined display is updated from the last displayed during the 10R probability variation large role game.

Further, in the total acquisition number notification effect during the non-electric bonus period, the total acquisition number is displayed in the center of the main effect display unit 200a so that the total acquisition number is more conspicuous than during the 10R probability variation large role game. Then, in the total acquisition number notification effect during the non-electric bonus period, the number of game balls acquired during the non-electric bonus period is added to the total acquisition number acquired in the 10R probability variation large role game. That is, the total number of acquisitions notification effect during the non-electric bonus period is started in a state where the total number of acquisitions acquired during the 10R probability variation large role game is displayed. Here, during the non-electric bonus period, the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a is large during the 10R probability variation large role game. It is added to the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into the winning opening 126.

However, during the non-electric bonus period, in addition to the number of game balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a, the second starting opening 122 and The number of game balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into other winning openings such as the general winning opening 118 may be further counted.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (f) and 101 (g), the mini symbol changes in the upper right portion of the main effect display unit 200a during the second special 2 change, as in the first special 2 change. The display is running. Then, when the 10th set of open games is completed, the ending effect is executed. In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 101 (h), the number of round games and the total number of acquired games, which are counted over the non-electric bonus period from the 10R probable big role game, are notified. This ending effect continues until the second special 2 variation is completed, and when the second special 2 variation is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, FIG. 101 (i) As shown in, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (j), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are varied and displayed with the start of the third special 2 variation. Although detailed description is omitted, during the third and subsequent special 2 fluctuations, the variation effect of the reach-less variation pattern and the reach variation pattern is executed as in the above-mentioned effect reference example.

Here, the non-electric bonus period is a period during which the player can acquire a prize ball by opening the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. However, in 10 sets of open games, the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a are not opened unless the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 123. As described above, in the open game of each set, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the production is executed as follows.

For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 in the first set of open games. In this case, during the interval after the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed, an instruction effect for prompting the launch of an appropriate game ball is executed. This instruction effect is executed in place of the winning effect or together with the winning effect until the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 123.

Further, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the number of round games is not updated in the round number notation effect. Therefore, for example, in the first set of open games, the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, and in the second set of open games, the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 123. The number of round games displayed during the second set of open games is "11".

Further, in the 10th set of open games, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the instruction effect is not executed and the ending effect is executed. That is, in the 10th set of open games, when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, the start timing of the ending effect is higher than when the game ball enters the ordinary electric winning opening 123. It will be faster. The content of the ending effect is the same regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the normal electric winning opening 123 in the 10th set of open games.

Therefore, in the 10th set of open games, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123, it takes a long time from the end of the ending effect to the end of the second special 2 change. turn into. Therefore, in the embodiment, after the ending effect is completed, a background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed is executed.

FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect content of the first effect system. For example, if the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during the first set of open games, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the message "Aim to the right" and the right direction An instruction effect in which an arrow is displayed is executed. Here, although the instruction effect and the above-mentioned direction instruction effect are different, the same direction instruction effect as above is executed even when the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during the open game. May be done.

Then, for example, when a game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 during the second set of open games, the number of round games is displayed as "EXTRA 11R" as shown in FIG. 102 (b). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the normal electric winning opening 123 during the 10th set open game after the 9th set open game is executed. In this case, after the normal electric winning opening 123 is closed in the 10th set of open game, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 102 (d). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 102 (e), a background effect in which a predetermined background image is displayed is executed. Although it is assumed that the background effect is executed here, the pseudo-variation effect described later may be executed instead of the background effect.

FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating a second effect system. If the first and second special 2 fluctuations are both lost and the non-electric bonus period is not given after the 10R probable change big role game, the production system becomes the second production system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variation large role game, and two special 2 fluctuations are executed after the lapse of the ending period. In each of these two special 2 fluctuations, the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. In addition, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started during the first special 2 fluctuation, 10 sets of open games will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

Also in the second production system, the round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variation large role game, and the direction instruction production is executed with the start of the 10th round game. To. Normally, the direction instruction effect ends with the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, but if the variation display of the normal symbol does not start, the direction instruction effect continues until the start of the second special 2 variation. Will be executed.

Then, with the start of the second special 2 change, the ending effect is executed. This ending effect has the same contents as the above-mentioned first effect system. Then, when the ending effect is completed, the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the probabilistic state is executed, and then the pseudo variation effect is executed until the second special 2 variation is completed. In the example shown in FIG. 103, since the non-electric bonus period is not given, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect end at the start of the second special 2 change.

FIG. 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the second effect system. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), after the 10R probability variation large role game, the direction instruction effect is executed during the first special 2 change, and the change display of the normal symbol is not started, and the first special 2 is performed. Suppose the fluctuation is over. In this case, with the end of the special 2 variation, the mini symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper right portion of the main effect display unit 200a. Then, with the start of the second special 2 variation, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Here, since the non-electric bonus period is not given, the number of round games executed in the 10R probable big role game and the total number of acquisitions during the 10R probable big role game are notified.

When the ending effect is executed for a predetermined time, the mode transition effect is then executed. In this mode transition effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), "probability change mode entry" is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, suggesting a transition to the probability change state. During the ending effect and the mode transition effect, the variation display of the mini symbol is executed, and it is notified that the second special 2 variation is in progress.

Then, when the mode transition effect is executed for a predetermined time, the pseudo-variation effect is then executed. In this pseudo-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. Here, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed so as to be slightly shaken. After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the temporary stop display shown in FIG. 104 (d) are repeated.

The effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as a temporary stop display in a combination of symbols on which three different numbers are written, that is, in a lost mode. Further, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are variably displayed so as to rotate 180 degrees from the front side displayed on the main effect display unit 200a to the back side. At this time, on the back side, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c to be temporarily stopped next are displayed. Hereinafter, the period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c once to the end of the temporary stop display is referred to as pseudo variation. The time required for one pseudo-variation is, for example, 1 to 2 seconds, and this pseudo-variation is repeated during the pseudo-variation effect.

The pseudo-variation effect is executed until the end of the second special 2 variation, and at the end of the special 2 variation, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed instead of the temporary stop display. As described above, the second special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation large role game is designed so that the fluctuation time is determined to be 70 seconds on the premise that the effect corresponding to the non-electric bonus period is executed. When the non-electric bonus period is not given, the execution timing of the ending effect is advanced and the mode transition effect is executed as compared with the case where the non-electric bonus period is given.

However, if the ending effect or the mode transition effect is executed for 70 seconds, not only the player feels tired but also distrust may be given. Therefore, by executing the pseudo-variation effect as described above, it is possible to give the impression that the special 2 variation is being executed many times, and to dispel fatigue and distrust.

FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram for explaining the third effect system, and FIG. 105 (b) is a diagram for explaining the fourth effect system. If the first special 2 fluctuation is a loss, the second special 2 fluctuation is a big hit, and a non-electric bonus period is given after the 10R probable change big role game, the production system becomes the third production system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variation large role game, and after the ending period elapses, two special 2 fluctuations are executed. Of these two special 2 fluctuations, in the first special 2 fluctuation, the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, and in the second special 2 fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. The second special symbol display 162 is stopped and displayed. Further, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbol is started, and after the winning symbol is displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games is executed after the opening period. This auxiliary game ends during the special 2 fluctuation regardless of the start timing of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

In the third production system, the round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variation large role game. Then, the direction instruction effect is executed with the start of the tenth round game, and the generation effect is executed with the start of the variation display of the normal symbol. After that, the winning effect is executed from the start of the first set of open games to the end of the tenth set of open games, and from the end of the tenth set of open games to the end of the second special 2 change. The villa production is performed. In the third effect system as well, the round number notation effect and the total acquisition number notification effect are executed as in the first effect system. That is, the third production system is different from the first production system in that the consecutive villa production is executed instead of the ending production, and all the other productions are the same.

FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the third effect system. As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (g), in the third production system, as in the first production system, a round effect, a direction instruction effect, a generation effect, a winning effect, a round number notation effect, and a total acquisition number notification The production is executed. Then, when the tenth set of open games is completed, as shown in FIG. 106 (h), the consecutive villa production is executed. Here, in the consecutive villa production, after the message "Stealing the jackpot" is displayed on the main production display unit 200a, as shown in FIG. 106 (i), the production symbols 210a, 210b, 210c on which the number 7 is written are displayed. A stop display is displayed, and the player is notified of the winning of the jackpot.

Here, when the second special 2 change is completed, the second 10R probable change big role game is started. During this second 10R probability variation large role game, as in the first 10R probability variation large role game, a round effect, a direction instruction effect, a round number notation effect, and a total acquisition number notification effect are executed. In addition, a non-electric bonus period may be further granted even after the end of the second 10R probability variation large role game. In this way, if you win the jackpot in the second special 2 fluctuation, the first 10R probable big role game, the first non-electric bonus period, the second 10R probable big role game, and the second non-electric bonus period will continue. ..

Here, at the start of the second 10R probability variation large role game, the number of round games is displayed by adding "1" to the final number of round games in the first non-electric bonus period by the round number notation effect. Further, at the start of the second 10R probability variation large role game, the total number of acquisitions displayed at the end of the first non-electric bonus period is displayed by the total acquisition number notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), after the 10R probability variation large role game, the first special 2 fluctuation is a loss, the second special 2 fluctuation is a big hit, and the non-electric bonus period is not given. , The production system becomes the fourth production system.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variation large role game, and after the ending period elapses, two special 2 fluctuations are executed. Of these two special 2 fluctuations, in the first special 2 fluctuation, the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, and in the second special 2 fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. The second special symbol display 162 is stopped and displayed. In addition, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started during the first special 2 fluctuation, 10 sets of open games will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

Also in the 4th production system, the round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 10R probability variation large role game, and the direction instruction production is executed with the start of the 10th round game. To. The direction instruction effect is continuously executed until the start of the second special 2 change.

Then, the ending effect is executed with the start of the second special 2 variation, the mode transition effect is executed when the ending effect is completed, and then the pseudo variation effect is executed. In this pseudo-variation effect, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the predetermined time when the second special 2 variation ends, and then the effect effect device 202 operates the character effect. Will be done. That is, the content of the effect of the fourth effect system is the same as that of the second effect system until the middle of the pseudo-variation effect.

FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the fourth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (d), in the fourth effect system, a direction instruction effect, an ending effect, a mode transition effect, and a pseudo-variation effect are executed in the same manner as in the second effect system. Then, in the pseudo-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), in the final pseudo-variation, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode. After that, a bonus effect is executed in which the predetermined effect accessory device 202 operates from the initial position to, for example, a movable position located in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and after the effect accessory device 202 returns to the initial position, The second special 2 change is completed.

In this way, by providing the fourth effect system in which the pseudo-variation effect is executed as in the second effect system, there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot will be notified even during the pseudo-variation effect. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation even for the pseudo-variation effect, and fatigue can be reduced.

FIG. 108 (a) is a diagram for explaining the fifth effect system, and FIG. 108 (b) is a diagram for explaining the sixth effect system. If the first special 2 fluctuation is a big hit and a non-electric bonus period is given after the 10R probability change big role game, the production system becomes the fifth production system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), 10 round games are executed in the 10R probability variation large role game, and after the ending period elapses, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 change, the jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol display 162.

Further, during the first special 2 variation, the variation display of the normal symbol is started, and after the winning symbol is displayed, the auxiliary game, that is, 10 sets of open games is executed after the opening period. In this case, the auxiliary game ends during the second 10R probable big role game. Here, the auxiliary game is generally designed to end during the 3rd to 5th round game.

In the fifth effect system, the round effect is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the first 10R probability variation large role game, and the direction instruction effect is executed with the start of the 10th round game. Further, with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, a second generation effect different from the above-mentioned generation effect is executed. After that, a special effect is executed from the start of the first round game in the second 10R probable big role game to the end of the ninth round game.

The special effect may be executed with the start of the first set of open games. Then, during the 10th round game in the second 10R probability variation large role game, the direction instruction effect is executed, and thereafter, the effect is executed in the same manner as described above. During the second 10R probable change big role game, the total number of acquisitions notification effect is executed.

FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the fifth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (c), in the fifth production system, as in the first production system, during the first 10R probability variation large role game, a round production, a direction instruction production, a round number notation production, and a total The acquisition number notification effect is executed. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the first special 2 variation, the second generation effect is executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), in the second generation effect, "festival opening" is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

During the second generation effect, the mini symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the first special 2 variation is completed and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, FIG. 109 (e) is shown. As shown in, the mini-design with the number "7" is stopped and displayed. Then, when the first round game is started, a special effect is executed. In this special effect, as shown in FIGS. 109 (f) to (h), a special background image is displayed, and the total number of acquired game balls acquired by the player is updated and displayed by the total acquired number notification effect. To.

In this total acquisition number notification effect, the total acquisition number is continuously updated and displayed from the first 10R probability variation large role game. Further, here, the second 10R probable big role game and the non-electric bonus period are simultaneously performed. Therefore, in the total number of winnings notification effect, the number of prize balls paid out by the game ball entering the large winning opening 126, and the game ball enters the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a. The number of prize balls paid out is mixed and counted and displayed. Then, in the tenth round game in the second 10R probability variation large role game, as shown in FIG. 109 (i), the direction instruction effect is executed again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first special 2 fluctuation is a big hit after the 10R probability variation large role game and the non-electric bonus period is not given, the production system becomes the sixth production system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), 10 round games are executed in the first 10R probability variation large role game, and after the ending period elapses, the first special 2 variation is executed. In this first special 2 variation, the jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, and the second 10R probability variation large role game is executed. However, if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started during the first special 2 fluctuation, 10 sets of open games will not be executed and the non-electric bonus period will not be granted.

Also in the 6th production system, the round production provided for each round game is executed during the 1st to 9th round games in the 1st 10R probability variation large role game, and the direction instruction production is performed with the start of the 10th round game. Is executed. The direction instruction effect is continuously executed until the end of the first special 2 change. Then, when the second 10R probable change large role game is started, the direction instruction effect is executed again, and then the effect is executed in the same manner as the first 10R probable change large role game.

FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect content of the sixth effect system. As shown in FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (c), in the sixth effect system, the round effect and the direction instruction effect are executed during the first 10R probability variation large role game as in the second effect system. The direction instruction effect is continuously executed even during the first special 2 change, and the mini symbol is changed and displayed during this special 2 change. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 and the second 10R probability variation large role game is started, the direction instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 110 (d).

Here, the display content is different from the direction instruction effect executed during the 10th round game in the first 10R probability variation large role game in the direction instruction effect executed with the start of the second 10R probability variation large role game. There is. However, the direction instruction effect executed during the 10th round game in the first 10R probability change large role game may be continued until the second 10R probability change large role game. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the mini symbol on which the number "7" is written is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), a round effect, a round number notation effect, and a total acquisition number notification effect are executed during the first round game in the second 10R probability variation large role game. Here, the number of round games and the total number of acquisitions are reset at the start of the second 10R probability change large role game, but the number of round games and the total number of acquisitions counted during the first 10R probability change large role game can be inherited. good.

Next, the processing in the effect control board 330 for executing the effect related to the effect system described above will be described. In the following, the processing related to the above-mentioned effect system will be described, and the description of other processes and the same process as the above-mentioned effect reference example will be omitted. Further, in the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the order may differ from the actual processing.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating subtimer interrupt processing in the subcontrol board 330 according to the embodiment. The sub-timer interrupt process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the sub-timer interrupt process according to the above-mentioned effect reference example. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the additional process (S1300) is executed. This additional process will be described later.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The variation pattern command reception process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the variation pattern command reception process according to the above-mentioned simultaneous rotation reference example. Here, the case where the main control board 300 receives the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 2 variation will be described, and the case where the variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the special 1 variation is received will be described. Is omitted. Further, here, a case where a variation pattern command is received after the 10R probability variation large role game will be described.

(Step S1220-1)
The sub CPU 330a increments the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of special 2 fluctuations after the 10R probability variation large role game.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the number of fluctuations updated in step S1220-1 is 3 or more, that is, at the start of the third and subsequent special 2 fluctuations after the 10R probability variation large role game. As a result, if it is determined that the number of fluctuations is 3 or more, the process is transferred to step S1220-5, and if it is determined that the number of fluctuations is not 3 or more, the process is transferred to step S1220-7.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a executes a normal variation effect determination process for determining an execution pattern of the normal variation effect based on the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a executes a mini-symbol variation process for starting the variation display of the mini-symbol.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the number of fluctuations updated in step S1220-1 is 1, that is, whether it is the start of the first special 2 fluctuation after the 10R probability variation large role game. As a result, if it is determined that the number of fluctuations is 1, the process is transferred to step S1220-11, and if it is determined that the number of fluctuations is not 1, the process is transferred to step S1220-15.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the result of the first special 2 variation, that is, the result of the first big winning combination lottery is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1220-13, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1220-29.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU330a turns on the continuous winning flag indicating that the result of the first special 2 change is a big hit after the 10R probability change big role game. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous winning flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R probability variation large role game.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the result of the second special 2 variation, that is, the result of the second big winning combination lottery is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1220-23, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1220-17.

(Step S1220-17)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on. As will be described in detail later, the normal symbol variation flag is turned on when the variation display of the normal symbol is started during the first special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation large role game. If it is determined that the normal map fluctuation flag is on, the process is transferred to step S1220-19, and if it is determined that the normal map variation flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1220-21.

(Step S1220-19)
The sub CPU 330a performs the first effect system execution process for executing the effect of the first effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the first effect system described above at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-21)
The sub CPU 330a performs a second effect system execution process for executing the effect of the second effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the second effect system described above at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-23)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the normal map fluctuation flag is on, the process is transferred to step S1220-25, and if it is determined that the normal map variation flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1220-27. ..

(Step S1220-25)
The sub CPU 330a performs a third effect system execution process for executing the effect of the third effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-mentioned third effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-27)
The sub CPU 330a performs a fourth effect system execution process for executing the effect of the fourth effect system. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-mentioned fourth effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1220-29)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the determination of each of the above steps, and ends the variation pattern command reception process. In addition, based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, a process of displaying an image for variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, an audio output process, a lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, and the like are performed. The effect execution control will be performed.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol designation command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol designation command is set in step S710-19 of the normal symbol change waiting process, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1230-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the current gaming state is a specific state. As a result, if it is determined that it is in a specific state, the process is transferred to step S1230-3, and if it is determined that it is not in a specific state, the normal symbol designation command reception process is terminated.

(Step S1230-3)
The sub CPU330a turns on the normal map fluctuation flag. Although detailed description is omitted, the normal figure fluctuation flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second special 2 variation after the 10R probability variation large role game, or at the end of the second 10R probability variation large role game.

(Step S1230-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the continuous winning flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is on, the process is transferred to step S1230-7, and if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1230-9.

(Step S1230-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs the fifth effect system execution process for executing the effect of the fifth effect system, and ends the normal symbol designation command reception process. Here, a process for executing each effect constituting the above-mentioned fifth effect system at a preset opportunity and timing is performed.

(Step S1230-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs the generation effect execution process for executing the above-mentioned generation effect, and ends the normal symbol designation command reception process.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating an opening designation command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The opening designation command is set in step S630-21 of the special symbol stop symbol display process, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1240-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the continuous winning flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is on, the process is transferred to step S1240-3, and if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the opening designation command reception process is terminated. do.

(Step S1240-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is transferred to step S1240-5, and if it is determined that the normal figure fluctuation flag is not turned on, the opening designation command reception process is performed. To finish.

(Step S1240-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs the sixth effect system execution process for executing the effect of the sixth effect system, and ends the opening designated command reception process. Here, processing is performed to execute each of the effects constituting the sixth effect system described above at a preset opportunity and timing. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous winning flag is turned off, for example, at the end of the second 10R probability variation large role game.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening designation command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The large winning opening opening designation command is set in step S640-5 of the large winning opening opening pre-processing, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization processing.

(Step S1250-1)
The sub CPU 330a updates the round number counter that counts the number of rounds.

(Step S1250-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the continuous winning flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is on, the process is transferred to step S1250-5, and if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S1250-15. ..

(Step S1250-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the normal map fluctuation flag is turned on, the process is transferred to step S1250-7, and if it is determined that the normal map fluctuation flag is not turned on, the process is performed in step S1250-15. To move.

(Step S1250-7)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received large winning opening opening designation command and determines whether or not the first round game has started. As a result, if it is determined that the first round game has started, the process is transferred to step S1250-9, and if it is determined that the first round game has not started, the process is transferred to step S1250-11. ..

(Step S1250-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a special effect execution process for executing the special effect, and ends the process of receiving the special effect opening designation command.

(Step S1250-11)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received command for designating the opening of the winning opening, and determines whether or not the tenth round game has started. As a result, if it is determined that the 10th round game has started, the process is transferred to step S1250-13, and if it is determined that the 10th round game has not started, the command for designating the opening of the large winning opening. End the reception process.

(Step S1250-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a direction instruction effect execution process for executing the direction instruction effect, and ends the process of receiving the special winning opening open designation command.

(Step S1250-15)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received large winning opening opening designation command and determines whether or not the tenth round game has started. As a result, if it is determined that the 10th round game has started, the process is transferred to step S1250-17, and if it is determined that the 10th round game has not started, the process is performed in step S1250-19. Move.

(Step S1250-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs a direction instruction effect execution process for executing the direction instruction effect.

(Step S1250-19)
The sub CPU 330a performs a round effect execution process for executing a round effect according to the number of round games.

(Step S1250-21)
The sub CPU 330a updates the number of round games displayed in the round number notation effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1250-1 and ends the process of receiving the large winning opening designation command.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating a normal power release designation command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The general electric opening designation command is set in step S741-13 of the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1260-1)
The sub CPU 330a increments the open game number counter that counts the number of times the normal electric winning opening 123 is opened in one auxiliary game.

(Step S1260-3)
The sub CPU 330a confirms the open game number counter updated in step S1260-1 and determines whether or not the first set of open games has started. As a result, if it is determined that the opening game of the first set has started, the process is transferred to step S1260-5, and if it is determined that the opening game of the first set has not started, the general electric opening designation is specified. Ends command reception processing.

(Step S1260-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the continuous winning flag is turned on. As a result, if the continuous winning flag is turned on, the process of receiving the normal power release designation command is terminated, and if the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the process is moved to step S1260-7.

(Step S1260-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs a prize-winning effect execution process for executing the prize-winning effect, and ends the process of receiving the general power release designation command.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart illustrating a general electric closing designation command reception process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment. The general electric closing designation command is set in step S741-17 of the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process, and then transmitted in step S100-65 of the CPU initialization process.

(Step S1270-1)
The sub CPU 330a sets a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time in a determination timer that measures the waiting time until it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 123. Here, the predetermined time is the time required for the game ball that has entered the ordinary electric winning opening 123 to be reliably detected by the second starting opening detection switch 122s. The timer value of the determination timer is subtracted in the timer update process (S1100-5) of the sub-timer interrupt process.

(Step S1270-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the open game number counter is 10 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the open game number counter is 10 or more, the process is transferred to step S1270-5, and if it is determined that the open game number counter is not 10 or more, the general electric closing designation command is received. End the process.

(Step S1270-5)
The sub CPU 330a resets (sets to 0) the open game number counter, and ends the process of receiving the normal power closing designation command.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart illustrating an additional process (S1300) in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1300-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the continuous winning flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is turned on, the additional processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the continuous winning flag is not turned on, the processing is moved to step S1300-3.

(Step S1300-3)
The sub CPU330a determines whether the determination timer has been updated from 1 to 0 in the timer update process (S1100-5). As a result, if it is determined that the update is from 1 to 0, the process is transferred to step S1300-5, and if it is determined that the update is not from 1 to 0, the process is transferred to step S1300-25.

(Step S1300-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game ball has entered the normal electric winning opening 123 in the open game. Although detailed description is omitted, when the second start port detection switch 122s provided in the upper second start port 122 detects the game ball, a winning command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. Then, on the sub-control board 330, if a winning command is received between the start of one set of open games and the time when the determination timer reaches 0, the winning flag is turned on. Here, by loading the winning flag, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the normal electric winning opening 123. If it is determined that the game ball has entered, the process is transferred to step S1300-7, and if it is determined that the game ball has not entered, the process is transferred to step S1300-15. If it is determined that the game ball has entered, the winning flag is turned off.

(Step S1300-7)
The sub CPU 330a increments the round number counter. The round number counter updated here is the same as the round number counter updated in step S1250-1. That is, the common round number counter is updated at the start of the round game in the 10R probability variation large role game and when the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 in one set of open games. As a result, the number of round games of the 10R probability variation large role game and the number of open games in which the game ball enters the normal electric winning opening 123 are totaled and counted.

(Step S1300-9)
The sub CPU 330a updates the number of round games displayed in the round number notation effect to the number of rounds updated in step S1300-7.

(Step S1300-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the tenth set of open games is in progress based on the counter value of the open game number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the 10th set of open games is in progress, the process is moved to step S1300-13, and if it is determined that the 10th set of open games is not in progress, the additional process is terminated.

(Step S1300-13)
The sub CPU 330a sets a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time in the ending effect standby timer, and ends the additional processing. The predetermined time is slightly longer than the interval time (5 seconds). Further, the timer value of the ending effect standby timer is subtracted in the timer update process (S1100-5).

(Step S1300-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the tenth set of open games is in progress based on the counter value of the open game number counter. As a result, if it is determined that the 10th set of the open game is in progress, the process is transferred to step S1300-19, and if it is determined that the 10th set is not in the open game, the process is performed in step S1300-17. Move.

(Step S1300-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs an instruction effect execution process for executing the instruction effect, and ends the additional process.

(Step S1300-19)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the second special 2 fluctuation is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1300-21, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S1300-23.

(Step S1300-21)
The sub CPU 330a performs a continuous villa effect execution process for executing the continuous villa effect, and ends the additional process.

(Step S1300-23)
The sub CPU 330a performs a process for executing the ending effect and the background effect, and ends the additional process.

(Step S1300-25)
The sub CPU330a determines whether the ending effect standby timer has been updated from 1 to 0 in the timer update process (S1100-5). As a result, if it is determined that the update has been made from 1 to 0, the process is moved to step S1300-23, and if it is determined that the update has not been made from 1 to 0, the additional process is terminated.

Next, a modification applicable to the above embodiment will be described. Each of the modified examples and application examples described below has the same processing, playability, and effect content as those in the above-described embodiment on the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330. That is, the gaming machine 100 of the above embodiment may further include the configurations of the modified examples and the application examples described below. Hereinafter, the same components as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation handle 112. As described above, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a middle frame 104, and a front frame 106. The middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 102. The middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 can be opened and closed integrally with the outer frame 102. Hereinafter, the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are collectively referred to as a main body frame 107.

The operation handle 112 is provided on the main body frame 107, or more strictly, the front frame 106. The operation handle 112 includes a base member 112a that projects from the main body frame 107 toward the player side, that is, the front side of the game machine 100. The base member 112a is configured by attaching a cover member 112a ₁ that covers the cylindrical portion to the front side of the cylindrical tubular portion. The cover member 112a ₁ is formed in a hemispherical shape.

Further, the operation handle 112 includes a rotating member 113 that can rotate with respect to the base member 112a. The rotating member 113 has an annular ring portion 113a provided on the outer periphery of the base member 112a. The ring portion 113a is provided with a finger hook portion 113b that projects outward in the radial direction of the base member 112a. Here, as the finger hooking portion 113b, a first finger hooking portion 113b ₁ , a second finger hooking portion 113b ₂ , and a third finger hooking portion 113b ₃ are provided. However, the number of finger hooks 113b is only an example, and the rotating member 113 may include one or more finger hooks 113b.

FIG. 119 shows the initial position of the rotating member 113. The rotating member 113 (operation handle 112) can rotate clockwise in the drawing from the initial position shown in FIG. 119. Here, the rotating member 113 can rotate from the initial position to the maximum rotation position rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. That is, the player can operate the operation handle 112 within a predetermined angle range from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.

The first finger hook portion 113b ₁ is located on the leftmost side of the three finger hook portions 113b at the initial position of the rotating member 113. Further, the third finger hook portion 113b ₃ is located on the rightmost side of the three finger hook portions 113b at the initial position of the rotating member 113. The second finger hook portion 113b ₂ is located between the first finger hook portion 113b ₁ and the third finger hook portion 113b ₃ . These three finger hooks 113b are provided apart from each other in the circumferential direction.

As an example, the player puts the thumb of the right hand on the left side surface of the first finger hook portion 113b ₁ , and puts the middle finger and ring finger of the right hand between the second finger hook portion 113b ₂ and the third finger hook portion 113b ₃ . It is conceivable to rotate the rotating member 113 in this state.

FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating the dimensional relationship of the operation handle 112. Of the finger hooks 113b, the portion located on the outermost side in the radial direction is defined as the maximum protrusion. Further, the length from the rotation center axis O of the operation handle 112 to the maximum protrusion of the first finger hook portion 113b ₁ is defined as the distance L1, and the length from the rotation center axis O to the maximum protrusion of the second finger hook portion 113b ₂ . Let the distance L2 be, and let the distance L3 be the length from the rotation center axis O to the maximum protruding portion of the third finger hook portion 113b ₃ . Here, the distance L1 is larger than the distance L2, and the distance L2 is larger than the distance L3. At the initial position of the rotating member 113, all three finger hooking portions 113b are located above the rotation center axis O.

Further, the portion of the rotating member 113 in which the finger hook portion 113b is not provided has a semicircular shape with the rotation center axis O as the center of curvature, and the radius of the rotation member 113, that is, the rotation member from the rotation center axis O. The distance L4 to 113 is smaller than the distance L3.

The vertically lower edge of the main body frame 107 is the lower edge 107a, and the right edge of the main body frame 107 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 100 is the side edge 107b. Further, the length from the rotation center axis O of the operation handle 112 to the lower edge 107a is defined as a distance L5, and the length from the rotation center axis O of the operation handle 112 to the side edge 107b is defined as a distance L6. Here, the distance L6 is larger than the distance L5, and the distance L5 and the distance L6 are both larger than the distance L4.

Therefore, at the initial position of the rotating member 113, all of the operation handles 112 are within the range of the main body frame 107. That is, since the finger hook portion 113b is located above the rotation center axis O, the finger hook portion 113b does not protrude below the lower edge 107a at the initial position of the rotating member 113. Further, at the initial position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook portion 113b is on the right side of the side edge 107b, in other words, does not protrude in the width direction of the main body frame 107 beyond the range of the main body frame 107.

FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a maximum rotation position of the operation handle 112. As described above, the rotating member 113 can rotate within a range from the initial position to the maximum rotation position, and at the maximum rotation position, further clockwise rotation is restricted by a stopper mechanism (not shown). .. That is, the rotating member 113 cannot rotate further clockwise than the maximum rotation position shown in FIG. 121.

At the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, all of the operation handles 112 are within the range of the main body frame 107. More specifically, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the third finger hooking portion 113b ₃ is located at the lowermost position among the three finger hooking portions 113b. At this time, the third finger hook portion 113b ₃ does not protrude downward from the lower edge 107a. That is, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook portion 113b does not protrude below the lower edge 107a.

Further, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the second finger hooking portion 113b ₂ is located on the rightmost side among the three finger hooking portions 113b. At this time, the second finger hook portion 113b ₂ does not protrude to the right of the side edge 107b. That is, at the maximum rotation position of the rotating member 113, the finger hook portion 113b does not project to the right side of the side edge 107b.

Further, the maximum protruding portion of the first finger hooking portion 113b ₁ having the maximum protruding amount does not reach the lowest point position within the rotation locus range of the rotating member 113. In particular, here, the maximum protruding portion of the first finger hook portion 113b1 is always located above the rotation center axis O.

As described above, according to the first modification, regardless of the state of the operation handle 112, the finger hook portion 113b and all the parts of the operation handle 112 are separated from the lower edge 107a and the side edge 107b. It does not protrude to the outside of the main body frame 107. As a result, even when the main body frame 107 is placed on a ground surface such as a floor, the finger hook portion 113b does not come into contact with the ground surface, and the risk of damage to the operation handle 112 can be reduced.

Further, in the playability of the above embodiment, it is required to change the operation angle of the operation handle 112 according to the game state to separate the game balls. At this time, if the finger hook portion 113b projects downward from the lower edge 107a, the player's hand holding the operation handle 112 may come into contact with the ground contact surface or the like, and the operability may deteriorate. If the operability is lowered, the player cannot launch the game ball at the target location, which may cause a disadvantage.

As described above, since the finger hook portion 113b does not protrude downward from the lower edge 107a, the possibility that the player's hand comes into contact with the ground contact surface or the like is reduced, and the deterioration of operability can be suppressed. This makes it easier for the player to launch the game ball at the target location, and it is possible to suppress the disadvantage caused to the player.

Here, the operation handle 112 is provided on the front frame 106, but the operation handle 112 may be provided on the middle frame 104. In this case, it is preferable that a notch is provided at a position of the front frame 106 facing the operation handle 112 so that the operation handle 112 protrudes toward the front side of the front frame 106.

Further, as described above, the main body frame 107 includes the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106, but the dimensions of the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are slightly different. In the first modification, the distance L5 and the distance L6 are based on the one located relatively outside of the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106. However, the distance L5 and the distance L6 may be based on which of the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 is located relatively inward.

FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a first application example of the operation handle 112, and FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating a second application example of the operation handle 112. 122 and 123 show the torque according to the operation angle of the operation handle 112. In FIG. 122, the legend shown by the alternate long and short dash line shows a comparative example which is the torque of a general operation handle 112, and the legend shown by a solid line shows the torque of the operation handle 112 according to the first application example. ing. Further, in FIG. 123, the legend shown by the alternate long and short dash line shows the same comparative example as in FIG. 122, and the legend shown by the solid line shows the torque of the operation handle 112 according to the second application example.

Note that in FIGS. 122 and 123, "initial movement" indicates a state in which the operation angle of the operation handle 112 is 0 degrees at the start of the rotation operation with respect to the operation handle 112. Further, the "left-handed reference position" indicates the operation angle of the operation handle 112, which is the minimum strength at which the launched game ball reaches the game area 116. Further, the "right-handed reference position" indicates the maximum operating angle of the operating handle 112, that is, the full stroke state.

The horizontal axis of FIGS. 122 and 123 can be rephrased as the operation angle of the operation handle 112, and the operation angle becomes larger toward the right side of the graph. Therefore, when the operation angle is between the "initial movement" and the "left-handed reference position", the game ball does not reach the game area 116. Further, when the operation angle is less than a predetermined angle (predetermined rotation operation amount) between the "left-handed reference position" and the "right-handed reference position", the game ball flows down the first game area 116a and the operation angle is set. When the angle is equal to or larger than the predetermined angle (predetermined rotation operation amount), the game ball flows down the second game area 116b.

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, in the comparative example, the torque at the “initial movement” is 31N, the torque at the “left-handed reference position” is 69N, and the torque at the “right-handing reference position” is 152N. On the other hand, in the first application example, the torque at the "initial movement" is 6.8N, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is 13.6N, and the torque at the "right-handing reference position" is 23.8N. .. In the second application example, the torque at the "initial movement" is 27.2N, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is 54.4N, and the torque at the "right-handing reference position" is 95.2N.

In the following, the torque at the time of "initial movement" is referred to as the first operating torque, the torque at the "left-handed reference position" is referred to as the second operating torque, and the torque at the "right-handed reference position" is referred to as the third operating torque. In both the first application example and the second application example, the relationship of first operation torque <second operation torque <third operation torque is established.

Further, in the comparative example, the third operation torque is more than twice the second operation torque. Therefore, for example, when the flow position of the game ball is changed from the first game area 116a to the second game area 116b, the torque rapidly increases. Therefore, in the comparative example, if the gaming state or the like is changed frequently, the player may get tired of the operation. Further, for example, when the flow position of the game ball is changed from the second game area 116b to the first game area 116a, it becomes difficult to adjust the operating angle to an appropriate level, which may be disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the first application example and the second application example, the third operation torque is twice or less the second operation torque. In this way, since the difference between the second operating torque and the third operating torque is small, the operating torque does not increase sharply between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position, and the player can use the second operating torque and the third operating torque. I feel that the difference from the operating torque is small. As a result, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced. Further, for example, when the flow position of the game ball is changed from the second game area 116b to the first game area 116a, it becomes easy to adjust to an appropriate operation angle, and the disadvantage caused to the player is reduced.

The operation angle from the "initial movement" to the "left-handed reference position" is defined as the first operating angle, and the operating angle from the "initial movement" to the "right-handed reference position" is defined as the second operating angle. In this case, the first operation angle and the second operation angle can be appropriately designed. For example, the first operation angle is 45 ° to 60 °, the second operation angle is 100 ° to 120 °, and the first operation is performed. The angle (eg, 45 °) may be less than or equal to half the second operating angle (eg, 100 °).

Further, the method of setting the torque is not particularly limited, but the operation handle 112 is provided with an elastic member for returning the operation angle to the initial position, and the torque can be easily applied by setting the spring coefficient of the elastic member. Can be set.

As described above, by applying the first application example or the second application example to the above-mentioned embodiment and various modified examples, the operability of the player is improved, and an appropriate game according to the game playability can be achieved. It will be possible.

FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a game board 108x according to a second modification. In the second modification, the processing and playability in the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 are the same as those in the above embodiment.

On the other hand, in the second modification, the configuration of the game board 108x is different from that of the above embodiment, and the other configurations are the same as those of the above embodiment unless otherwise specified. Therefore, the same components as those in the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 108x shown in FIG. 124 is held in the middle frame 104 in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The game board 108x includes an outer rail 500, a rail base 502, and a decorative board 503. An outer rail 500 is provided on the front surface of the game board 108x. The outer rail 500 is made of a thin metal plate member, and similarly to the rail 114a according to the above embodiment, the outer rail 500 stands upright in the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the game board 108x with respect to the front surface of the game board 108x. Specifically, the outer rail 500 extends from the lower part of the game board 108x toward the upper left, and is above the game board 108 from the vicinity of the left side surface of the game board 108x and at the center in the width direction. It extends toward the vicinity of the right side surface of the game board 108x via the vicinity.

The outer rail 500 is gently curved as a whole, and the launched game ball is guided by the outer rail 500 to the game area 116. Further, a through hole 108a is formed in the game board 108, and an inner member 402 standing upright on the front side of the game board 108 is provided on the upper portion of the through hole 108a. The inner member 402 is attached to the game board 108 and prevents the game ball from falling into the through hole 108a.

The game area 116 is a space surrounded by the decorative plate 503, the transmission plate 110, the outer rail 500, and the inner member 402 in the game board 108x, and is an area where the game ball can flow down or roll. A large number of nails and windmills are provided on the game board 108x so that the game ball guided to the game area 116 collides with the nails and the windmills and flows down and rolls in an irregular direction.

The game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of entry of the game ball differs from each other according to the firing intensity of the firing mechanism. The first gaming area 116a is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second gaming area 116b is the gaming area 116 as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 100. It is located on the right side of. Therefore, the game ball launched by the firing mechanism with a firing intensity lower than the predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a, and the game ball launched with the firing intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined strength enters the second game area 116b. It will be.

Although not shown, in the second modification, the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the gate 124, the first large winning opening 126, and the second large winning opening are also omitted. 128, outlet 130 and rail 114b are provided. Also in the second modification, the first starting port 120 and the rail 114b are provided in the first gaming area 116a, and the second starting port 122, the gate 124, the first big winning opening 126, and the second big winning opening 128 are provided. It is provided in the second gaming area 116b.

Further, also in the second modification, the second starting port 122 is composed of a variable starting port that can be changed to an open state or a closed state. In a normal game executed based on the entry of a game ball into the gate 124, when a winning symbol is won, an opening / closing game in which the second starting port 122 is opened / closed is executed. As a result, even in the second modification, the same playability as in the above embodiment is realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 124, the game board 108x includes a rail base 502 made of resin. The outer rail 500 is attached to the rail base 502. Then, the rail base 502 to which the outer rail 500 is attached is attached to the decorative plate 503 to form the game board 108x.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an outer rail 500 in a state before being attached to the rail base 502. As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the outer rail 500 has holes penetrating the outer rail 500, and guide portions 504 that guide the mounting position of the outer rail 500 to the game board 108x are formed at intervals. ing. As will be described in detail later, in the outer rail 500, the guide portions 504 are not formed at equal intervals.

Further, the start end portion 506a of the outer rail 500 is provided with a start end bending portion 506b. Further, the terminal portion 508a of the outer rail 500 is provided with a terminal bent portion 508b. Further, the outer rail 500 is provided with two holes 505 that are used when processing the outer rail 500 and penetrate the outer rail 500, in addition to the guide portion 504.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), one of the holes 505 is provided between the end portion 508a and the guide portion 504 provided on the most end portion 508a side. Further, one of the holes 505 is provided between the guide portion 504 closest to the start end portion 506a side and the guide portion 504 second closest to the start end portion 506a side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), each guide portion 504 is arranged so as to be offset to one side from the center in the width direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the outer rail 500.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the end bent portion 508b provided at the end portion 508a of the outer rail 500 has a substantially U-shape, and the start end bent portion 506b of the start end portion 506a of the outer rail 500 has a substantially L shape. It has a shape.

FIG. 126 shows a perspective view of the game board 108x, the outer rail 500, and the rail base 502 according to the second modification in a disassembled state. As shown in FIG. 126, the rail base 502 is provided with protrusions 510 inserted into the guide portion 504 of the outer rail 500 at predetermined intervals. That is, the same number of protrusions 510 are provided at the same intervals as the guide portions 504.

Further, a start end support portion 512b for supporting the start end bending portion 506b of the outer rail 500 is formed on the start end portion 512a of the rail base 502. The start end support portion 512b is formed with a hole into which the start end bending portion 506b can be inserted. Then, by inserting the start end bending portion 506b into the start end support portion 512b, the start end support portion 512b supports the start end bending portion 506b.

Further, a terminal support portion 514b for supporting the terminal bent portion 508b of the outer rail 500 is formed at the terminal portion 514a of the rail base 502. The terminal support portion 514b is provided with a protrusion (not shown) for hooking a substantially U-shaped portion of the terminal bent portion 508b. Then, by hooking the substantially U-shaped portion of the terminal bent portion 508b on this protrusion, the terminal bent portion 508b is supported by the terminal support portion 514b.

When attaching the outer rail 500 to the rail base 502, first, as described above, the end bent portion 508b of the outer rail 500 is attached to the end support portion 514b of the rail base 502.

Next, each protrusion 510 of the rail base 502 is inserted into each guide portion 504 of the outer rail 500, and the start end bending portion 506b of the outer rail 500 is inserted into the start end support portion 512b of the rail base 502.

At this time, the outer rail 500 is deformed along the guide surface 516 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rail base 502. Due to this deformation, the outer rail 500 generates a force that returns to its original shape due to elastic deformation. Due to this elastic deformation force, the outer rail 500 is in a state of being pressed against the guide surface 516. This elastic deformation force is such that the outer rail 500 does not deviate from the rail base 502 due to vibration caused by an external force.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a cross section A in FIG. 124 for the game board 108x according to the second modification. As shown in FIG. 127, the guide surface 516 is inclined so as to cover the game ball launched along the outer rail 500. In the A cross section, the guide surface 516 is inclined to the right side of the gaming machine 100. This prevents the gaming ball from jumping out to the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 100 and colliding with the transmission plate 110.

Further, the guide portion 504 and the protrusion 510 inserted into the guide portion 504 are provided so as not to come into contact with the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, the guide portion 504 and the guide portion 504 are provided so as to be located between the surface of the decorative plate 503 and the center of the game ball in contact with the decorative plate 503. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the guide portion 504 and the protrusion 510 and being repelled.

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the position of the guide portion 504 in a state where the outer rail 500 according to the second modification is attached to the game board 108x. Note that FIG. 128 omits the rail base 502 for the sake of clarity.

Further, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide portion 504 is provided in the first range H1 which is the range from the start end P1 which is the end of the start end portion 506a of the outer rail 500 to the left end P2 located on the leftmost side of the outer rail 500. There are three. Further, two guide portions 504 are provided in the range H2 from the left end P2 of the outer rail 500 to the uppermost upper end P3 of the outer rail 500. Further, the guide portion 504 is not provided in the third range H3 which is the range from the upper end P3 to the end P4 which is the end of the end portion 508a of the outer rail 500.

In other words, the number of guide portions 504 provided on the outer rail 500 is larger in the first range H1 than in the second range H2, and in the second range H2 than in the third range H3. It has become.

As a result, the impact received from the game ball is large, and the number of guide portions 504 is increased on the game ball launcher side, which requires particular accuracy in the arrangement of the outer rail 500, and the outer rail 500 on the game ball launcher side is increased. It is possible to reliably suppress displacement and vibration.

Further, since the speed of the game ball is lower than immediately after it is launched from the game ball launcher, the impact received from the game ball is small, and the terminal P4 side having less influence on the game has the number of guide portions 504. The number can be reduced, and the outer rail 500 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 502.

In the outer rail 500, the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 is set to be equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the number is equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3.

Further, in the outer rail 500, the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 is set to be equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the number is equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3.

Further, in the outer rail 500, the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 is set to be equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the number is equal to or greater than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3.

Further, as described above, three guide portions 504 are provided in the first range H1 which is the range from the start end P1 of the outer rail 500 to the left end P2 of the outer rail 500. Further, two guide portions 504 are provided in the fourth range H4, which is the range from the left end P2 of the outer rail 500 to the terminal P4 of the outer rail 500. That is, in the outer rail 500, the number of guide portions 504 provided in the first range H1 is larger than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the fourth range H4, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained. can get.

Further, as described above, five guide portions 504 are provided in the fifth range H5, which is the range from the start end P1 of the outer rail 500 to the upper end P3 of the outer rail 500. Further, the guide portion 504 is not provided in the third range H3, which is the range from the upper end P3 of the outer rail 500 to the end P4 of the outer rail 500. That is, in the outer rail 500, the number of guide portions 504 provided in the fifth range H5 is larger than the number of guide portions 504 provided in the third range H3, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained. can get.

Further, as described above, four guide portions 504 are provided in the sixth range H6, which is the range from the start end P1 of the outer rail 500 to the intermediate P5 corresponding to the center of the entire length of the outer rail 500. Further, one guide portion 504 is provided in the seventh range H7, which is the range from the intermediate P5 of the outer rail 500 to the terminal P4 of the outer rail 500. That is, in the outer rail 500, the number of the guide portions 504 provided in the sixth range H6 is larger than the number of the guide portions 504 provided in the seventh range H7, so that the same effect as described above can be obtained. can get.

Further, as described above, in the second modification, the outer rail 500 is attached to the rail base 502 by inserting the protrusion 510 provided on the rail base 502 into the guide portion 504 provided on the outer rail 500. On the other hand, there is no need to fix it with screws. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the outer rail 500 is fixed to the rail base 502 with screws. Further, when the outer rail 500 is removed for replacement, the step of removing the screws is unnecessary, and the outer rail 500 can be easily removed with a small number of man-hours.

Further, since the guide portion 504 is a hole penetrating the outer rail 500 as described above, when the guide portion 504 is formed at the apex, the outer rail 500 may be unintentionally deformed at the apex. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, the guide portion 504 is not formed at the left end (left apex) P2 and the upper end (upper apex) P3. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the outer rail 500 is unintentionally deformed at the apex (left end P2, upper end P3). Further, since the guide portion 504 is not formed at the left end (left apex) P2 and the upper end (upper apex) P3 where the game ball is likely to come into contact, the deviation and vibration of the outer rail 500 can be reliably suppressed. can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game is interrupted due to the displacement or vibration of the outer rail due to the game ball coming into contact with the outer rail, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the second modification described above, the guide portion 504 and the protrusion 510 inserted into the guide portion 504 are prevented from contacting the game ball with the surface of the decorative plate 503 and the game ball in contact with the decorative plate 503. Although the case where the guide portion 504 and the guide portion 504 are provided so as to be located between the guide portion 504 and the center of the guide portion 504 is shown, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the guide portion 504 and the guide portion 504 may be provided so as to be located on the front side of the game machine 100 with respect to the center of the game ball in contact with the decorative plate 503.

If the impact received from the game ball is large and the outer rail 500 on the game ball launcher side, which requires particular accuracy in the arrangement of the outer rail 500, is not accurately attached, the outer rail 500 vibrates, which causes the outer rail 500 to vibrate. There is a possibility that the behavior of the game ball may be significantly changed, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, by applying the second modification in addition to the playability of the above embodiment, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage caused to the player.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these also naturally belong to the technical scope of the present invention. Will be done.

In the above embodiment, the case of a so-called simultaneous turning machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a so-called first-class gaming machine, a second-class gaming machine, and a first-class second-class mixing machine.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the gaming state is provided by the combination of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state has been described, but the gaming state is not limited to this. In any case, at least a starting port including a variable starting port is provided in the game area, and as a gaming state, there are a normal state and a specific state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable starting port than in the normal state. It may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an advantageous game advantageous to the player, a case where a large role game in which the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times is executed has been described. However, the specific content of the advantageous game is not particularly limited as long as the game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state progresses.

Further, in the above embodiment, the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, and the B time saving gaming state are provided as the normal gaming states, but the game ball enters the variable start opening rather than the non-time saving gaming state. It suffices to provide at least one state in which the above is easy. Further, the A time saving game state may be set so as not to win the prize. Further, in the normal game, whether or not the auxiliary game is executed may be determined according to the game state without performing the normal drawing lottery. For example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 in the B time saving game state, the auxiliary game is executed without acquiring a random number, and in other normal game states, the auxiliary game is not executed in advance. May be good.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a, the normal game state is set to the A time reduction game state. However, for the predetermined jackpot symbol, the normal gaming state may be set to the B time reduction gaming state even when the gaming ball does not enter the probability variation region 140a. For example, when the special symbol D is determined, the normal gaming state may be set to the B time-shortening gaming state regardless of whether or not the gaming ball has entered the probability variation region 140a.

Further, in the above embodiment, by setting the second fluctuation time in the specific state to a long time, after the result of the general drawing lottery is derived in the specific state, and before the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is started, the game is played. The state can be changed from a specific state to another game state. However, for example, the first or third and subsequent fluctuation times in a specific state may be set longer than the time from the opening start to the end of the normal electric winning opening 123. In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the predetermined number of times after the end of the big role game to be longer than the time from the opening start to the end of the ordinary electric winning opening 123, before the opening of the ordinary electric winning opening 123 is started. The game state can be changed from a specific state to another game state.

Further, for example, the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation (at the time of big hit and at the time of loss) in the B time shortening game state is longer than the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the start of opening of the normal electric winning opening 123. It may be set. In this case, when the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time saving game state is a big hit, it is possible to notify the winning of the big hit before the non-electric bonus. In this case, the non-electric bonus is effective when the jackpot winning notification is not obstructed and the jackpot winning notification with higher profit is prioritized. In addition, according to the above settings, the special 2 fluctuation can be executed at least twice before the start of the non-electric bonus, so even if the end condition of the B time saving game state does not include the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, it is not. The normal game state at the start of the electric bonus can be changed to the non-time saving game state. Thereby, as in the above embodiment, it is possible to prevent the base during the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high due to the non-electric bonus.

Further, for example, the fluctuation time (at the time of big hit and at the time of loss) of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time reduction game state is set from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the non-time reduction game state to the end of opening of the normal electric winning opening 123. It may be set longer than the time of. If the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state to the start of opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is longer than the fluctuation time of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time-saving game state, the big role game If you win in the regular drawing lottery just before the end of, the change display of the next normal symbol will not start during the B time saving game state, and the special 2 change will start twice and change from the B time saving game state to the non-time saving game state. After that, there is a possibility that the variable display of the next normal symbol will start. In this case, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started in the B time saving game state, the non-electric bonus cannot be obtained. As described above, the fluctuation time (at the time of big hit and at the time of loss) of the first special 2 fluctuation in the B time reduction game state is started from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the non-time reduction game state, and the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is started. By setting it longer than the time until, it is possible to start the variable display of the normal symbol during the B time saving game state.

Further, by changing the game state from the specific state to another game state before the opening of the normal electric winning opening 123 is started, the number of game balls does not increase in the specific state.

Further, it goes without saying that the production in the above embodiment is only an example, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the above embodiment, the simultaneous turning machine has been described, but any of the winning order digestion, the special 2 priority digestion, and the special 1 priority digestion may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case of the winning order digestion has been described, but the special 2 priority digestion or the special 1 priority digestion may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the set value of 6 stages is provided has been described, but the set value may not be provided, and the number of set values is not particularly limited. Further, in the above embodiment, it is determined that the winning probability of the jackpot differs depending on the set value. However, what is different depending on the set value is not limited to this.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as the areas where the game balls can be hit has been described. However, the board surface configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

The special symbol hit determination process corresponds to the hit / fail determination of the present invention, and the main CPU 300a that executes the special symbol hit determination process corresponds to the determination means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a that executes the large winning opening closing effective processing from the special symbol stop symbol display processing corresponds to the advantageous game execution means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a that executes the above-mentioned large winning opening end wait process corresponds to the state setting means of the present invention.
Further, the ordinary symbol hit determination process corresponds to the second hit / fail determination of the present invention, and the main CPU 300a that executes the ordinary symbol hit determination process corresponds to the second determination means of the present invention.
Further, the main CPU 300a that executes the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing from the normal symbol stop symbol display processing corresponds to the open / close control means of the present invention.
Further, the first non-electric winning opening 127a and the second non-electric winning opening 129a correspond to the winning opening of the present invention.
Further, the payout control board 310 corresponds to the payout control means of the present invention.

100 Pachinko machine 122 2nd starting port 127a 1st non-electric winning opening 129a 2nd non-electric winning opening 300 Main control board 300a Main CPU
300b main ROM
300c main RAM

Claims (1)

A starting port including at least a variable starting port is provided in the gaming area, and as a gaming state, a normal state and a specific state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable starting port than the normal state are provided. It ’s a game machine,
A determination means for determining whether or not the ball is hit or miss based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port.
Based on the fact that the winning determination result is derived from the winning / failing determination, the advantageous game execution means for executing the advantageous game advantageous to the player, and the advantageous game execution means.
A state setting means capable of setting the gaming state after the advantageous game to the specific state, and
A second determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a second determination means.
Based on the fact that the winning determination result is derived by the second hit / fail determination, the opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the variable starting port according to the opening / closing conditions corresponding to the gaming state, and the opening / closing control means.
A winning opening that is openable and closable in the game area and can be opened by a game ball that has entered the variable starting opening.
A payout control means for paying out a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into the winning opening,
Equipped with
The open / close control means
The second hit / fail determination is executed during the specific state, and after the second hit / miss determination and before the start of the open / close control of the variable start port, the gaming state is changed from the specific state to another game. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the opening and closing of the variable starting port according to the opening and closing conditions of the specific state when the state is changed.

Images